S-Cross Owner's Manual 25-June 2015 LPPL Final Updated ... · (wgn (knvgt (wgn vcpm ecr (wgn nkpgu cpf eqppgevkqp .gcmcig (wgn nvgt ycvgt ftckpkpi )&"5*/( "/%,1$ /#4- h %jgemgf 1-

��

�� MARUTI SUZUKI INDIA LIMITED believesin conservation and protection of Earth’snatural resources.To that end, we encourage every vehicleowner to recycle, trade-in or properly dis-pose of, as appropriate, used Engine Oil,coolant and other fluids, batteries andtyres etc.

��

�� !�� "� #$��#��# ��%��$!&��'��"�#� �� #� ��#� �� %!"��&��(� !#� ��%��'#�#�� #�� &��)# *� ��#�#��+�"#�$� &�#%��&�# �"#�,##�� !�� $� +�!�� '#��&�#(�� # #�'# � ��#� ��)�� -#� %��$!&��&��)# ��+��#*�,��!��&#��$,��!�� &!��)� ��+� �"��)�� -#� ��#� ��#� �� &��)# � ��'#��&�# �%�#'��! �+�"!�� $(

�� '#��&�#��+��&��%�+�,�� $��$ ��#)!�� #��&�!��# (.#��#��#�%��)��#)� �#�� '#��&�#��+��#��&�!��+*�&�#&-��%%��&�"�#��#)!�� $��-#��+��#&# � ��+��$��&�� (

This manual is an essential part of your vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when resold or otherwise transferred to a new owner or operator. Please read this manual carefully before operating your new vehicle and review the manual from time to time. It contains important information on safety, operation and maintenance. You are invited to avail the three Free Inspection Services as described in the manual. Three free inspection coupons are attached to this manual. Please show this manual to your while you take your vehicle for any Service.

��/

��0��1/ 2� ��3NOTICE/

NOTEPlease read this manual and follow itsinstructions carefully. To emphasize spe-cial information, the symbol and the words��1,� 2� ��*� NOTICE� andNOTE have special meanings. Pay particu-lar attention to messages highlighted bythese signal words:

NOTE:Indicates special information to makemaintenance easier or instructions clearer.

75F135

The circle with a slash in this manualmeans “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-pen”.

��2�� 1

��1��$�&��# � �� %��#�� 4��$� ��&�!�$� �# !�� $#�� #��! ��5!�+(

2� ��$�&��# � �� %��#�� 4��$� ��&�!�$� �# !�� $#��#��5!�+(

NOTICE��$�&��# � �� %��#�� 4��$� ��&�!�$��# !��'#��&�#�$��)#(

��1��$��+�+�!��'#��&�#(��$��&�� &�!�$� �$'#� #�+� ��#&�� #�+*��$��)*� %#��&#*� �� $!��"��+��$��+�'��#�)�'#��#��#)!�� (� ��$$��*�$��)#��%#��&#� %��"�#� � �# !��)� ��$��&�� +� �� "#� &�'#�#$!�$#��,��+(

NOTICE

NOTICE�#'#�#� $��)#� ��+� "#� &�! #$� "+��#� ! #� �� #��#�� %�� 6!��+� �!#��$3�� !"��&�� #&��#�$#$"+�� (

�� !�� !�� "�� # ��$��%��%�� "�

0-3

VEHICLE DETAILS

MODEL CHASSIS NO. ENGINE NO. KEY NO. DATE OF DELIVERY

ODOMETERREADING (KM)

BATTERY

MAKE SR.NO.BATCH CODE

OWNER’S NAME & ADDRESS ________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________

E-mail ID_____________________________________________________________TEL.NO. ______________________________

ADDRESS/STAMP OF SELLING DEALER SELLING DEALER CODE

SHOWROOM

WORKSHOP IMPORTANT INFORMATION TO CUSTOMER

Dear Customer,For any assistance with regard to our product, please contactGeneral Manager/Works Manager at�any of our�

�For may contact our

��7F: .... FREE SERVICE, P:.... PAID SERVICE, W:.... WARRANTY JOB, A:.... ACCIDENTAL JOB

DATE OFSERVICE

KIND OFSERVICE

MILEAGE(KM)

DESCRIPTION OF JOB NAME OF SERVICING DEALER JOB CARD NO. MECHANIC’SSIGNATURE

��2��8�2��2��

0-5

WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki India Limited (hereinafter called “Maruti Suzuki”),warrants that each new Maruti Suzuki vehicle distributed in Indiaby Maruti Suzuki and sold by an authorised Maruti Suzuki N dealer will be free, under normal use and service, from any defects in material and workmanship at the time of manufacture SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS:

The� Maruti� Suzuki vehicle must be delivered by� an authorisedMaruti� Suzuki N dealer and serviced by

(2) Term:The term of the warranty shall be twenty-four (24) months or40,000 kilometers (whichever occurs first) from the date ofdelivery to the first owner.

(3) Maruti Suzuki Warranty Obligation:If any defect(s) should be found in the vehicle within the term stip-ulated above, Maruti Suzuki’s only obligation is to repair or replaceat its sole discretion any part shown to be defective, with a newpart or the equivalent at no cost to the owner for parts or labour,when Maruti Suzuki acknowledges that such a defect is attribut-able to faulty material or workmanship at the time of manufacture.The owner is responsible for any repair or replacements which arenot covered by this warranty.

(4) Limitation:This warranty shall not apply to: (a) Normal maintenance service required other than the three

free services, including without limitation, oil and fluidchanges, headlight aiming, fastener retightening, wheel bal-ancing, wheel alignment and tyre rotation, cleaning of injec-tors, adjustment of clutch and valve clearance.

(b) The replacement of normal wear parts including without lim-itation, bulbs, tyres and tubes, spark plugs, belts, hoses, fil-ters, wiper blades, brushes, contact points, fuses, clutchdisc, brake shoes, brake pads, cable and all rubber parts(except oil seal and glass run).

(c) Any vehicle which has been used for competition or racing.(d) Any repairs or replacement required as a result of accidents

or collision.(e) Any defects caused by misuse, negligence, abnormal use or

insufficient care.(f) Any vehicle which has been modified or altered, including

without limitation, the installation of performance accesso-ries.

(g) Any vehicle on which parts or accessories not approved byMaruti Suzuki have been used.

(h) Any vehicle which has not been operated in accordance withthe operating instructions in this Owner’s Manual and Ser-vice Booklet.

(i) Any vehicle which has not received, during the warranty term,the service inspections prescribed in this Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet.

(j) Any vehicle which has been assembled, disassembled,adjusted or repaired by other than authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop.

(k) Any vehicle which has been used� for purposes other� thanwhat it was designed for.

(l) Any damage or deterioration caused by industrial pollutionand bird droppings.

(1) Qualification:To qualify for this�warranty:

0-6

(m) Insignificant defects which do not affect the function of thevehicle including without limitation, sound, vibration and fluidseep.

(n) Any natural wear and tear including without limitation, agingetc.

(o) Installation and usage of domestic LPG gas/LPG Cylinder.(p) V-belts, hoses and gas leaks.(q) Any vehicle retrofitted with LPG/CNG kits.

(5) Extent of Warranty:This warranty is the entire written warranty given by Maruti Suzukifor Maruti Suzuki vehicles and no dealer or its or his agent oremployee is authorised to extend or enlarge this warranty and nodealer or its or his agent or employee is authorised to make anyoral warranty on Maruti Suzuki’s behalf.Maruti Suzuki reserves the right to add any improvements orchange the design of any model at any time with no obligation tomake the same changes on units previously sold.

(6) Warranty Service:To obtain warranty service,�the�complete vehicle must be�pre-sented at the�owner’s expenses to any authorised Maruti Suzuki��.

(7) Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:It is responsibility of each owner to:

– Make certain that the PDl card was completed at the time ofdelivery of the vehicle;

– Have performed, at his own expenses, by an all the service�inspections�specified

in the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s�Manual and Service Booklet”and maintain adequate proof� that such service inspectionshave been performed.

– Make certain that the theservice inspection has�certified the work on the “MaintenanceService Record”�page in the “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet” and

– Present the Maruti Suzuki “Owner’s Manual and ServiceBooklet” to the when-ever�requesting service inspections or warranty service.

If the “Owner’s Manual and Service Booklet should be lost ordestroyed the owner should consult the authorised Maruti Suzuki�� from whom the vehicle was purchased for instructionsconcerning replacement of the “Owner’s Manual� and ServiceBooklet.

(8) Disclaimer of Consequential Damage:Maruti Suzuki assumes no responsibility for loss of vehicle, loss oftime, inconvenience or any other indirect incidental or consequen-tial damage resulting from the vehicle not being available to theowner because of any defect covered by this warranty.

(9) Change of OwnerEven if ownership of the vehicle changes, the remaining warrantyperiod is effective for the new owner.

0-7

EMISSION WARRANTY POLICY

Maruti Suzuki offers the Emission Warranty on all Maruti Suzukivehicles (apart from the Regular Warranty and will run parallel tothe regular product warranty) only in four metropolitan cities (NewDelhi, Kolkata, Mumbai and Chennai) with effect from July 1st,2001.

Terms:The Emission Warranty will be applicable for 80,000 kms or 3years (Whichever comes earlier) from the date of delivery to thefirst owner. The remaining warranty terms will be valid in case ofany change in ownership provided the production of all valid docu-ments.

Conditions:1. Under Emission Warranty, Warranty claims will be admitted for

a prima-facie examination, in case vehicle fails to meet theEmission Standard as specified in sub rule (2) of rule no. 115of Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR), 1989.

2. The warranty claims will only be accepted after examinationcarried out by Maruti Suzuki or authorised Maruti Suzuki��which leads to firm conclusions that thea) Original settings have not been tempered in any case.b) Part (as given in Annexure - A) has a manufacturing defect.c) Vehicle is unable to meet the Emission Standards (as given

in 1.), inspite of the vehicle having been maintained andused in accordance with the instructions as specified inOwner’s Manual and Service Booklet and the used fuel anddifferent oils (Engine oil, Transmission oil, Brake oil etc.) arealso as per specification.

3. The method of examination for deciding the warranty of theparts will be at the sole discretion of Maruti Suzuki and autho-rised Maruti Suzuki �� and results of the�examination will be final and binding. If after examination, the�warrantable condition is not established, Maruti Suzuki and�authorised Maruti Suzuki �� has the right to charge�all, or part of the cost of such examination.

4. Under Emission Warranty, the parts (as given in Annexure - A)will be changed free of cost, but the consumables will becharged as per actual.

5. If the part covered under Emission Warranty or the associatedparts, are not independently replaceable, on account of thesebeing integral parts of a complete assembly, Maruti Suzuki�and authorised Maruti Suzuki �� ill have the sole�discretion to replace either the entire assembly or by using�some of the parts of the system through suitable repairs or�modifications.

6. Any consequential repairs or replacement of parts which maybe found necessary to establish compliance of Emission War-ranty, will not be considered under warranty, unless the sameis�under product warranty. The consumable will be chargedas� per actual under such repair or replacement.

7. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for the cost of transporta-tion of the vehicle to the nearest

or any loss due to non-availability of� thevehicleduring the period of lodging of a warranty claim� andexamination and/or repair by

.8. Maruti Suzuki will not be responsible for any penalty that may

be charged by statutory authorities on account of failure tocomply with the EMISSION STANDARDS.

0-8

55KS0-74E

9. Emission Warranty will not be affected by the change of owner,provided all the documents are available.

10.All maintenance actions (as specified in the Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet) need to be followed and recorded in themanual for emission warranty.

11.The customer needs to produce the PUC (Pollution UnderControl) certificate valid for the period preceding the test duringwhich the failure is discovered. The receipts (for the mainte-nance of the vehicle as per specification in Owner’s Manualand Service Booklet from the date of original purchase of thevehicle) will also be required.

Conditions under which the Emission Warranty is notAPPLICABLE1. In the absence of valid PUC certificate.2. Vehicle not serviced from

as per the schedule specified in the� Owner’s Manual� and Service Booklet.

3. Vehicle subjected to abnormal use (accident, motor race, ral-lies or for the purpose of establishing the records etc).

4. Use of non MGP (Maruti Genuine Part).5. Vehicle that has been tampered with.6. Tampering with odometer so that the actual kilometer reading

can not be determined.7. Use of adulterated fuel and/or unspecified oils (Engine oil,

Transmission oil and Brake oil etc).

Annexure - AList of parts covered under Emission Warranty1. Fuel Injector Assembly, Pressure Regulator, Throttle Body

Assembly.2. Electronic Control Module (ECM).3. Intake Manifold.4. EGR valve.5. Ignition Coil.6. Canister Assembly.7. Vapour Liquid Seperator.8. Fuel Tank and Filler Cap.9. PCV (Positive Crankcase Ventilation) Valve.10. Oil Filler Cap.11. Catalytic Convertor.12. Exhaust Manifold.13. All Fuel Injection System related SENSORS.14. High Pressure Fuel Pump.15. Glow Plug.16. Glow Plug Controller.

��.��2��

/

9

7

:

;

<

=

>

��

��

� ��2��

.��8��1�

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

��8��1��0��

��@��2��A �0��

8�@�2��1��1�

��0�2��2��

��1��2?��8�2��

�00��2��2��

1��

�0�2��2��

� ��2��

�� 2��!#��#&��#�$��(((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( ��

��

� ��2��

�!#��#&��#�$��The diesel fuel should be with CetaneNumber (CN) higher than 51 and sulfurcontent less than 350 ppm (parts per mil-lion).MARUTI SUZUKI recommends to use thediesel fuel conformable to EN590. Do notuse marine diesel fuel, heating oils and soforth.

NOTICE��#� �!#�� -� �� %�&#� ��,� �� !#�� #B%�� ,#��#�(� �� +�!� &��!#� �� $$� �!#��#�� #� ��#�� 44�#� �� !��&��+� �!�� "��,�"�&-�&&!� *� ��#��&��"#��,��"#&��#�!��(� �B%� !�#� �� #�� ,�#�� !��+�!#�#$� �� #�� ,�� # !�� #�-�)#� $!#� �� !#�� #B%�� (� ��%�#'#�� !&��!#��#�-�)#*� ��%��)��#�� #� ��#�� 44�#� �� !��&��+� �!��*��,�#��! ��)��#��'#� ��!��&� + �#�*� ��'#��"��,�"�&-��&&!� (

NOTICE.#�&��#�!�� %��!#��&��)��&�� ,��#� �#�!#��)(� �� !#�� %��#$��#�'#��&�#�"�$+*�,�%#��!%��#$��#�+(� �!#� � &��)� ��&��&��&�! #�%��$��)#*�,��&�� &�'#�#$� !�$#�� #� �#,� 8#��&�#��#$��+(

BEFORE DRIVING

2

64MS0-74E

BEFORE DRIVINGKeys ...................................................................................... 2-1Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-2Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-5Security System (if equipped) ............................................ 2-14Windows .............................................................................. 2-18Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-20Front Seats .......................................................................... 2-23Rear Seats ............................................................................ 2-25Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-28Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) (if equipped).......................................................................... 2-42Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 2-48Speedometer ....................................................................... 2-49Tachometer .......................................................................... 2-49Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 2-49Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 2-50Brightness Control .............................................................. 2-50Information Display ............................................................. 2-51Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 2-64Lighting Control Lever ........................................................ 2-70Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ................................ 2-73Headlight Leveling Switch .................................................. 2-74Turn Signal Control Lever .................................................. 2-74Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 2-75Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 2-75Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steering Lock Lever ......... 2-79Horn ...................................................................................... 2-80Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped) ....................... 2-80

2-1

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Keys

54G489

Your vehicle comes with a pair of keys.The key(s) may or may not be equippedwith a transmitter depending on modelvariant. Keep the spare key in a safeplace. One key can open all of the locks onthe vehicle.The key identification number is stampedon a metal tag provided with the keys or onthe keys. Keep the tag (if equipped) in asafe place. If you lose your keys, you willneed this number to have new keys made.Write the number below for your future ref-erence.

Immobilizer System This system is designed to help preventvehicle theft by electronically disabling theengine starting system.The engine can be started only with yourvehicle’s original immobilizer ignition keyor keyless push start system remote con-troller which has an electronic identificationcode programmed into it. The key orremote controller communicates the identi-fication code to the vehicle when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON” position orthe engine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to ON. If you need to makespare keys or remote controllers, see yourauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop. Thevehicle must be programmed with the cor-rect identification code for the spare. A keymade by an ordinary locksmith will not startthe engine.

80JM122

If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light blinks when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position or the ignitionmode is ON, the engine will not start.

NOTE:If the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light blinks or comes on, amessage may be shown on the informationdisplay.For vehicles without keyless push startsystemIf this light blinks, turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position, then turn it back tothe “ON” position.If the light still blinks after the ignitionswitch is turned back to the “ON” position,there may be something wrong with yourkey or with the immobilizer system. Askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop tohave the system inspected.For vehicles with keyless push startsystemIf this light blinks, change the ignition modeto “LOCK” (OFF), then change back to“ON”. Also refer to “If the master warningindicator light blinks and the engine cannotbe started” in “Starting the Engine (Vehiclewith Keyless Push Start System)” in the“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.If the light still blinks after the ignition modeis changed back to “ON”, there may besomething wrong with your key or with theimmobilizer system. Ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop to have the sys-tem inspected.The immobilizer/keyless push start systemwarning light may also blinks if the remotecontroller is not in the vehicle when you

KEY NUMBER:

EXAMPLE

2-2

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

close the door or attempt to start theengine.NOTE:• If you lose your immobilizer ignition key

or remote controller, see your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop as soon as pos-sible to have the lost one deactivated,then have the new key or remote con-troller made by them.

• If you own other vehicles with immobi-lizer keys, keep those keys away fromthe ignition switch or the engine switchwhen using your Vehicle, or the enginemay not start because they may interferewith your vehicle’s immobilizer system.

• If you attach any metal objects to theimmobilizer key or remote controller, itmay not start the engine.

Ignition Key Reminder (if equipped)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

Door LocksSide Door Locks

64MS018

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

To lock a front door from outside the vehi-cle:• Insert the key and turn the top of the key

toward the rear of the vehicle, or• Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and

hold the door handle as you close thedoor.

To unlock a front door from outside thevehicle, insert the key and turn the top ofthe key toward the front of the vehicle.

NOTICEThe immobilizer key and remote con-troller are sensitive electronic instru-ments. To avoid damaging them:• Do not expose them to impacts,

moisture or high temperature suchas on the dashboard under directsunlight.

• Keep them away from magneticobjects.

(3)

(1)

(2)

(4)

2-3

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

64MS019

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turnthe lock knob forward. Turn the lock knobrearward to unlock the door.To lock a rear door from outside the vehi-cle, turn the lock knob forward and closethe door. You do not need to pull and holdthe door handle as you close the door.NOTE:Be sure to hold the door handle when youclose a locked front door, or the door willnot remain locked.

Central Door Locking System

64MS020

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK(3) Front(4) Rear

You can lock and unlock all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) simultaneously by usingthe key in the driver’s door lock.To lock all doors simultaneously, insert thekey in the driver’s door lock and turn thetop of the key toward the rear of the vehi-cle once.To unlock all doors simultaneously, insertthe key in the driver’s door lock and turnthe top of the key toward the front of thevehicle twice.

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.To unlock the driver’s door only, insert thekey in that door lock and turn the top of thekey toward the front of the vehicle once.

64MS021

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

You can also lock or unlock all doors bydepressing the front or rear of the switch,(3) respectively.

(1)(2)

Door Lock KnobEXAMPLE(3)

(1)(2)

(4)

(1)(2)

(3)

EXAMPLE

2-4

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:• You can also lock or unlock all doors by

operating the transmitter or remote control-ler. Refer to “Keyless Push Start SystemRemote Controller/Keyless Entry SystemTransmitter” in this section.

• If your vehicle is equipped with the keylesspush start system, you can also lock orunlock all doors by pushing the requestswitch. Refer to “Keyless Push Start Sys-tem Remote Controller/Keyless Entry Sys-tem Transmitter” in this section.

NOTE:• All doors are automatically unlocked when

you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position and pull out the key, or press theengine switch to change the ignition modeto LOCK (OFF).

• All doors are automatically locked for safetywhen the vehicle speed reaches 15 km/h.

• You can change the automatic locking orunlocking function mentioned above via thesetting mode of the information display. Fordetails on how to use the information dis-play, refer to “Information Display” in thissection.

Child-Proof Locks (rear door)

61MM0A046

(1) Lock position(2) Unlock position

Each of the rear doors is equipped with achild-proof lock which can be used to helpprevent unwanted opening of the doorfrom inside the vehicle. When the locklever is in the lock position (1), the reardoor can only be opened from outside.When the lock lever is in the unlock posi-tion (2), the rear door can be opened frominside or outside.

Tailgate

64MS133

(1) Tailgate unlatch switch(2) Request switch (if equipped)

Vehicle with keyless entry systemYou can lock and unlock the tailgate byusing the driver’s door lock key.To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.Vehicle with keyless push start systemYou can lock or unlock the tailgate bypushing the request switch (2), when thekeyless push start system remote control-ler is within the switch’s operating range.For details refer to “Keyless Push StartSystem Remote Controller/Keyless EntrySystem Transmitter” in this section.To open the tailgate push the tail gateunlatch switch (1) and lift the tail gate toopen the trunk lid.The tail gate unlatch switch (1) operatesonly to open the tail gate.

WARNINGBe sure to place the child-proof lockin the lock position whenever chil-dren are seated in the rear.

(2)

(1)

EXAMPLE(1) (2)

EXAMPLE

2-5

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

When all the doors are closed and if thekeyless push start remote controller is leftin the trunk, the tail gate will be automati-cally unlatched.NOTE:When the tailgate is closed incompletely,follow the procedure below:1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and

open the tailgate.2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed

completely.

If you cannot unlatch the tailgate by push-ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis-charged battery or malfunction, follow theprocedures below to unlatch the tailgatefrom inside the vehicle.1) Remove the luggage compartment

cover (if equipped) and fold the rearseat forward for easier access. Refer to“Folding Rear Seats” section for detailson how to fold the rear seat forward.

2) Push open the tailgate from inside bypushing up on the emergency lever (2)

using a flat blade screwdriver or thejack handle. The tailgate will be latchedagain by closing the tailgate simply.

68LM246

If the tailgate cannot be unlatched by push-ing the unlatch switch (1), have the vehicleinspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System Transmitter

64MS022

Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-less push start system remote controller(Type A) or a keyless entry system trans-mitter (Type B). The remote controller hasa keyless entry system and a keyless pushstart system. The transmitter has only akeyless entry system. For details, refer tothe following explanations.

WARNINGAlways make sure that the tailgate isclosed and latched securely. Com-pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-vent occupants from being thrownfrom the vehicle in the event of anaccident. Completely closing it alsohelps keep exhaust gases from enter-ing the vehicle. CAUTION

• To avoid injury, do not use your fin-ger to push the emergency lever.

• Make sure there is no one near thetailgate when pushing open the tail-gate from inside the vehicle.

(2)

EXAMPLEType A Type B

2-6

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Keyless Push Start System Remote Controller (Type A)The remote controller enables the follow-ing operations:• You can lock or unlock the doors by

operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttonson the remote controller. Refer to theexplanation in this section.

• You can lock or unlock the doors bypushing the request switch. For details,refer to the explanation in this section.

• You can start the engine without usingan ignition key. For details, refer to“Engine Switch” in the “OPERATINGYOUR VEHICLE” section.

68LM206

(1) Lock button(2) Unlock button

You can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate) simultaneously by operatingthe remote controller near the vehicle.

Central door locking system• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-

ton (1) once.• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once.• To unlock other doors, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren will sound once when the doorsare locked.When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren will sound twice.• If the interior light switch is in the

“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you press the engine switchduring this time, the light will start to fadeout immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the “LOCK” button (1). If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the “UNLOCK” button (2) isoperated, the doors will automatically lockagain.

WARNINGRadio waves from the keyless pushstart system antenna(s) may interferewith operation of electrical medicalequipment such as pacemakers. Fail-ure to take the precautions listedbelow can increase the risk of severeinjury or death due to radio waveinterference.• Anyone who uses electrical medi-

cal equipment such as a pace-maker should consult the medicalequipment supplier or their medicaladvisor about whether radio wavesfrom the antenna(s) can interferewith the medical equipment.

• If radio wave interference is a con-cern, have the function of theantenna(s) disabled by your autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

2-7

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:• If you lock the doors using the remote

controller when the engine hood is open,the siren will sound 3 times to remindyou.

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using theremote controller, the siren will sound 4times to remind you. If this happens,check whether your vehicle has beenbroken into while you were away from it.

• Once you push both of the “LOCK” but-ton (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), thenyou push one of the buttons within 5 sec-onds, the siren will not sound. However,If you push one of the buttons twicewithin 5 seconds, or push one of the but-tons 5 seconds later, the siren willsound.

• You can set whether the siren soundswhen locking or unlocking the door(s) viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),but this can vary depending on the sur-roundings, especially near other trans-mitting devices such as radio towers orCB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe remote controller if the ignition modeis other than the LOCK (OFF).

• When any door is open, if you push the“LOCK” button on the remote controller,the exterior buzzer will sound and doorscannot be locked.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop as soon as possible for a replace-ment. Be sure to have your dealerprogram the new remote controller codein your vehicle’s memory so that the oldcode is erased.

Panic alarm functionThis function is to get the attention of oth-ers. Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec-onds. The turn signal lights will blink forabout 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds at the sametime.To cancel the panic alarm, press any but-ton (LOCK OR UNLOCK). You can alsochange the ignition mode to ON to cancelthe panic alarm.NOTE:The panic alarm function will not activatewhen the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”.

Keyless unlocking/locking using therequest switches

64MS134

When the remote controller is within theoperating range described in this section,you can lock or unlock the doors (includingthe tailgate) by pushing the request switch(1) on the driver’s door handle, front pas-senger’s door handle or tailgate.To lock all doors when all doors areunlocked:• To lock all doors, push one of the

request switches once.The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren will sound once when the doorsare locked.To unlock a door or all doors:• Push one of the request switches once

to unlock only one door.• Push one of the request switches twice

to unlock all doors.

(1) EXAMPLE

2-8

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren will sound twice.• If the interior light switch is in the door

position, the interior light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out. Ifyou press the engine switch during thistime, the light will start to fade out imme-diately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the request switch to lock thedoors.NOTE:• If you lock the doors using the request

switch when the engine hood is open,the siren will sound 3 times to remindyou.

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using therequest switch, the siren will sound 4times to remind you. If this happens,check whether your vehicle has beenbroken into while you were away from it.

• You can set whether the siren soundswhen locking or unlocking the door(s) viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-

mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

NOTE:• The door locks cannot be operated by

the request switch under the followingconditions: – If any door is open or is not completely

closed.– If the ignition mode is other than

LOCK (OFF).• If no doors are opened within about 30

seconds after unlocking the doors bypushing the request switch, the doorswill be locked again automatically.

80J056

(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

When the remote controller is withinapproximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from afront door handle or the tailgate switch, youcan lock or unlock the doors by pushingthe request switch.NOTE:• If the remote controller is outside the

request switch operating rangedescribed above, you will not be able tooperate the request switch.

• If the battery of the remote controllerruns down or there are strong radiowaves or noise, the request switch oper-ating range may be reduced or theremote controller may be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to thedoor glass, the request switches may notoperate.

• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-cle, the request switches may not oper-ate normally.

• The remote controller will only operate arequest switch if it is within the switch’soperating range. For example, if theremote controller is within the operatingrange of the driver’s door request switchbut not the front passenger’s doorrequest switch or the tailgate requestswitch, the driver’s door switch can beoperated but the front passenger’s doorswitch or tailgate switch cannot be oper-ated.

• Avoid operations of switch with sharpobjects.

NOTICE• Do not operate request switch with

sharp metal object.• Do not use high pressure water on

request switch.

(1)

(1)

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-9

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:The keyless push start system may notfunction correctly in certain environmentsor under certain operating conditions suchas the following:• When there are strong signals coming

from a television, power station or a cel-lular phone.

• When the remote controller is in contactwith or covered by a metal object.

• When a radio wave type remote keylessentry is used nearby.

• When the remote controller is placednear an electronic device such as per-sonal computer.

Some additional precautions you shouldtake and information you should be awareof are: • Make sure the key is stowed in the

remote controller. If the remote controllerbecomes unreliable, you will not be ableto lock or unlock the doors.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,ask your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop as soon as possible for a replace-ment. Be sure to have your dealerprogram the new remote controller codein your vehicle’s memory so that the oldcode is erased.

• You can use up to four remote control-lers and the keys for your vehicle. Askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshopfor details.

• The battery life of the remote controlleris about two years, but it can varydepending on usage conditions.

57L21016

To stow the key into the remote controller,push the key in the remote controller untilyou hear a click.

68LM247

To remove the key from the remote control-ler, push the button (A) in the direction ofthe arrow and pull the key out from theremote controller.

NOTICEThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging the remote controller:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such asby leaving it on the dashboardunder direct sunlight.

• Keep the remote controller awayfrom magnetic objects such as atelevision.

(A)

2-10

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Request switch warning buzzerThis exterior buzzer beeps for about 2 sec-onds in the following conditions to warnyou that the request switch is not working:• The request switch is pressed after all

doors are closed with the ignition modechanged to “ACC” or “ON” by pressingthe engine switch.

• The request switch is pressed in any ofthe following conditions after changingthe ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) bypressing the engine switch.– The remote controller is left inside the

vehicle.– Any door (including the tailgate) is

open.Press the request switch again after doingthe following:With the ignition mode changed to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, bringout the remote controller if it is inside thevehicle and check that all doors are com-pletely closed.

Reminder function

64MS165

If the remote controller is not in the vehicleunder the following conditions, the buzzersounds intermittently for about 2 secondsand the immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light on the instrument clusterblinks:When one or more doors are opened andall of the doors are later closed with theignition mode is other than “LOCK”.

The indicator light will turn off within sev-eral seconds after the remote controller isreturned to an area of the vehicle otherthan the rear luggage area.

If the remote controller is left in the vehicleand you lock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door as described below, the doorwill be automatically unlocked.• If you open the driver’s door and lock the

door by turning the lock knob forward or

pushing the power door locking switch,the driver’s door will be automaticallyunlocked.

• If you open the front passenger’s doorand lock the door by turning the lockknob forward or pushing the power doorlocking switch, the front passenger’sdoor will be automatically unlocked.

NOTE:• The reminder will not operate when the

remote controller is on the instrumentpanel, in the glove box, in a storagecompartment, in the sun visor or on thefloor etc.

• Be sure that the driver always carries theremote controller.

• Do not leave the remote controller in thevehicle when leaving the vehicle.

EXAMPLE

2-11

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Replacement of the batteryIf the remote controller becomes unreli-able, replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the remote con-troller:

71LMT0201

1) Pull the key out from the remote con-troller.

2) Insert a flat blade screwdriver coveredwith a soft cloth in the slot of the remotecontroller and pry it open.

68LM210

(1) Lithium disc type battery:CR2032 or equivalent

3) Replace the battery (1) so its + terminalfaces the bottom of the case as shownin the illustration.

4) Close the remote controller firmly.5) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the remote controller.6) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

NOTE:Used batteries must be disposed properlyaccording to applicable rules or regulationsand must not be disposed with ordinaryhousehold trash.

NOTICEWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch the electronic component in theremote controller with wet or oil-stained hands. Otherwise, the remotecontroller may be damaged.

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

(1)

NOTICEThe remote controller is a sensitiveelectronic instrument. To avoid dam-aging it, do not expose it to dust ormoisture or tamper with internal parts.

2-12

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Keyless Entry System Transmitter (Type B)

76MS011

(1) “Lock” button(2) “Unlock” button

You can lock or unlock all doors (includingthe tailgate) simultaneously by operatingthe transmitter near the vehicle.

Central door locking system• To lock all doors, push the “LOCK” but-

ton (1) once.• To unlock only the driver’s door, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once.• To unlock other doors, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once again.NOTE:You can switch the function that unlocks alldoors from twice operations to once opera-tion, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.The turn signal lights will flash once andthe siren (if your vehicle is equipped withthe security system) will sound once whenthe doors are locked.When the doors are unlocked:• The turn signal lights will flash twice and

the siren (if your vehicle is equipped withthe security system) will sound twice.

• If the interior light switch is in the“DOOR” position, the interior light willturn on for about 15 seconds and thenfade out. If you insert the key into theignition switch during this time, the lightwill start to fade out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after youoperate the lock button (1).

NOTE:If no door is opened within about 30 sec-onds after the unlock button (2) is oper-ated, the doors will automatically lockagain.NOTE:(For models with security system)• If you lock the doors using the transmit-

ter when the engine hood is open, thesiren will sound 3 times to remind you.

• If the security system was triggered dueto an unauthorized entry into the vehicleand then you unlock the doors using thetransmitter, the siren will sound 4 timesto remind you. If this happens, checkwhether your vehicle has been brokeninto while you were away from it.

• Once you push both of the “LOCK” but-ton (1) and “UNLOCK” button (2), thenyou push one of the buttons within 5 sec-onds, the siren will not sound. However,If you push one of the buttons twicewithin 5 seconds, or push one of the but-tons 5 seconds later, the siren willsound.

• You can set whether the siren soundswhen locking or unlocking the door(s) viathe setting mode of the information dis-play. For details on how to use the infor-mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

(1)(2)

2-13

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:• The maximum operating distance of the

keyless entry system transmitter is about5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary dependingon the surroundings, especially nearother transmitting devices such as radiotowers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks cannot be operated withthe transmitter, if the ignition key isinserted in the ignition switch.

• When any door is open, the door lockscan be operated only by unlocking withthe transmitter. With this unlocking oper-ation, the turn signal lights will flashtwice and the siren (if your vehicle isequipped with the security system) willsound twice.

• If you lose one of the transmitters, askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki workshopas soon as possible for a replacement.Be sure to have your dealer program thenew transmitter code in your vehicle’smemory so that the old code is erased.

Panic alarm function (if equipped)This function is to get the attention of oth-ers. Push both of the “LOCK” button (1) and“UNLOCK” button (2) for more than 3 sec-onds. The turn signal lights will blink forabout 27.5 seconds. Also, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds at the sametime.To cancel the panic alarm, press any but-ton (LOCK or UNLOCK). You can also turnthe ignition switch to the “ON” position tocancel the panic alarm.NOTE:The panic alarm function will not activatewhen the key is in the ignition switch.

Replacement of the batteryIf the transmitter becomes unreliable,replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

68LM248

1) Remove the screw (1), and open thetransmitter cover.

2) Remove the transmitter (2).

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingthe transmitter:• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such asby leaving it on the dashboardunder direct sunlight.

• Keep the transmitter away frommagnetic objects such as a televi-sion.

NOTICEWhen replacing the battery, do nottouch the electronic component inthe transmitter with wet or oil-stainedhands. Otherwise, the transmittermay be damaged.

(1)

(2)

2-14

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

64MS197

(4) Lithium disc type battery:CR1620 or equivalent

3) Put the edge of a flat blade screwdriverin the slot of the transmitter (2) and pryit open.

4) Hold the cover around the electric com-ponent (3), insert a precision screw-driver covered with insulating tape inthe space between the cover and thecomponent, and then remove the com-ponent.

5) Replace the battery (4) so its + terminalfaces the “+” mark of the transmitter.Insert the battery all the way into theholder.

6) Close the transmitter and install it intothe transmitter holder.

7) Close the transmitter cover, install andtighten the screw (1).

8) Make sure the door locks can be oper-ated with the transmitter.

9) Dispose of the used battery properlyaccording to applicable rules or regula-tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-ies with ordinary household trash.

NOTE:Used batteries must be disposed properlyaccording to applicable rules or regulationsand must not be disposed with ordinaryhousehold trash.

Security System (if equipped)The security system is armed in about 5seconds after you lock all doors (includingthe tailgate) by using the keyless entry sys-tem transmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch.Once the system is armed, any attempt toopen a door by using any other means (*)than the keyless entry system transmitter,keyless push start system remote control-ler or request switch, or open the enginehood, will cause the alarm to be triggered.* These means include the following:

– The key– The lock knob on a door– The central door locking switch

Also, in case that you have set the shocksensor to enabled state and set sensitivityof the pre-warning function and full blastwarning function to a level other than 0, thealarm will be triggered if any attempt ismade to tamper with the vehicle. Theshock sensor can be selected to enabledor disabled state, and sensitivity of eachwarning can be adjusted as desired. To setthe shock sensor, ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop or use the settingmode of the information display.NOTE:• The default setting of the shock sensor

is in the disabled state. Set to theenabled state and adjust sensitivity ofeach warning according to your prefer-ence. For details on how to use the infor-

(2)

(3)

(4)

WARNINGSwallowing a lithium battery maycause serious internal injury. Do notallow anyone to swallow a lithiumbattery. Keep lithium batteries awayfrom children and pets. If swallowed,contact a physician immediately.

NOTICEThe transmitter is a sensitive elec-tronic instrument. To avoid damagingit, do not expose it to dust or mois-ture or tamper with internal parts.

2-15

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

mation display, refer to “InformationDisplay” in this section.

• Your dealer may have already set theshock sensor of the vehicle to theenabled state before you purchase it.Consult your dealer for further informa-tion.

NOTE:• The security system generates alarms

when any of the predetermined condi-tions is met. However, the system doesnot have any function of blocking unau-thorized entry into the vehicle.

• Always use the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch tounlock the doors when the security sys-tem has been armed. Using a keyinstead will trigger the alarm.

• If a person who does not know the secu-rity system is going to drive the vehicle,we recommend you explain the systemand its operation to the person, or dis-able the system beforehand. Mistakenlytriggering the alarm may cause a nui-sance to others.

• Even if the security system is armed,you should still be careful to guardagainst theft. Do not leave money orthings of value in the vehicle.

How to arm the security system (when enabled)Lock all doors (including the tailgate) usingthe keyless entry system transmitter, key-less push start system remote controller orrequest switch. The security system indica-tor (1) will start blinking rapidly, and thesecurity system will be armed in about 5seconds.While the system is being armed, the indi-cator continues to blink at intervals ofapproximately 2 seconds

61MM0A134

NOTE:• To prevent the alarm from being acci-

dentally triggered, avoid arming it whileanyone remains inside the vehicle. Thealarm will be triggered if any personinside opens the door or engine hood, orswings the vehicle (if the shock sensor isin the enabled state).

• The security system is not armed whenall doors are locked using the key fromoutside, or using the door lock knobs orthe central door locking switch frominside.

• If any door is not operated within approx-imately 30 seconds after the doors havebeen unlocked using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push startsystem remote controller or requestswitch, the doors are automaticallylocked again. When the doors arelocked, the security system will bearmed in about 5 seconds if the systemis in the enabled state.

• If the security system indicator (1) blinkswhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”,there may be something wrong with thesecurity system. Ask your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop to inspect thesystem.

How to disarm the security systemSimply unlock the doors using the keylessentry system transmitter, keyless pushstart system remote controller or requestswitch. The security system indicator willgo out, indicating that the security systemis disarmed.How to stop the alarmShould the alarm be triggered accidentally,unlock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push start sys-tem remote controller or request switch, orinsert the key in the ignition switch and turn

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-16

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

it to “ON” position, or press the engineswitch to change the ignition mode to“ON”. The alarm will then stop.NOTE:• Even after the alarm has stopped, if you

lock the doors using the keyless entrysystem transmitter, keyless push startsystem remote controller or requestswitch, the security system will berearmed with a delay of about 5 sec-onds.

• If you disconnect the battery while thesecurity system is in the armed conditionor the alarm is actually in operation, thealarm will be re-triggered when the bat-tery is then reconnected.

• Even after the alarm has stopped at theend of the predetermined operation time,it will be triggered again if any of thedoors or engine hood is opened, or thevehicle feels a shock (if the shock sen-sor is in the enabled state), without dis-arming the security system.

Checking whether the alarm has beentriggered during parkingIf the alarm was triggered and you thenturn the ignition switch to “ON” position, orpress the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to “ON”, the security systemindicator will blink rapidly for about 8 sec-onds and a buzzer will beep 4 times duringthis period. If this happens, check whetherthe vehicle has been broken into while youwere away from it.

Enabling and disabling the securitysystemThe security system can be either enabledor disabled.When enabled• If any of the doors are opened without

unlocking by the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch, allturn signal lights start to blink and theinterior buzzer beeps intermittently. After5 seconds, the siren will sound for about27.5 seconds. The security system indi-cator continues to blink during this time.

• If the engine hood is opened, all turn sig-nal lights blink, and the siren sounds forabout 27.5 seconds. The security sys-tem indicator continues to blink duringthis time.

(If the shock sensor is in the enabledstate)• If the vehicle feels a shock, the siren

sounds for about 2 seconds (pre-warn-ing). If the vehicle continues to feel ashock, all turn signal lights start to blinkand the interior buzzer beeps intermit-tently. After 5 seconds, the siren willsound for about 27.5 seconds (full blastwarning). The security system indicatorcontinues to blink during this time.

NOTE:If you set the full blast warning sensitivityhigher than the pre-warning sensitivity inthe setting mode of the information display,or the vehicle feels such shock as to beable to trigger the full blast warning, the fullblast warning will be triggered preferen-tially. In this case, the pre-warning will notbe triggered.When disabledWhen the system is disabled, it stays dis-armed even if you perform any systemarming operation.How to switch the state of the securitysystemWhen the security system has beenalready disarmed, you can switch the sys-tem from the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, using the followingmethod.1) Sit in the driver’s seat and make sure

that all doors are closed, and then turnthe ignition switch to “ON” position orpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to ON.• If any door is open, the open door

warning light comes on.

2-17

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

64MS002

76MH0B004

2) Turn the lock knob (1) on the driver’sdoor rearward (2). Turn the knob on thelightning control lever to the OFF posi-tion (3).

NOTE:The following steps 3) and 4) must becompleted within 15 seconds.

76MH0B005

3) Turn the knob on the lighting controllever to the position and then turnback to the OFF position. Repeat thisoperation 4 times.

64MS024

4) Push the lock end (4) (forward end) ofthe central door locking switch (5), andthen push the unlock end (6) (backwardend). Repeat this operation 3 times.

Every time you perform the series of theabove steps, the state of the security sys-tem changes from the currently selectedone to the other. You can check whetherthe system is enabled or disabled by thenumber of interior buzzer beeps at the endof the procedure as follows.

• If you cannot complete the operations instep 3) and 4) within 15 seconds cor-rectly, the state of the security systemwill not change and the interior buzzerdoes not beep. Perform the procedureagain from the beginning.

NOTE:You can also switch the security systemfrom the enabled state to the disabledstate, and vice versa, via the setting modeof the information display. For details onhow to use the information display, refer to“Information Display” in this section.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(3

EXAMPLE

OFF

4 times

EXAMPLE

(4)(6)

(5)

EXAMPLE

3 times

System state Number of beeps

Disabled(Mode A) Once

Enabled(Mode D) 4 times

2-18

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

WindowsElectric Window ControlsThe electric windows can only be operatedwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is ON.Driver’s side

64MS025

The driver’s door has a switch (1) to oper-ate the driver’s window, and a switch (2) tooperate the front passenger’s window orthere are switches (3), (4), to operate therear left and right passenger windows,respectively.

Passenger’s door

64MS026

The passenger’s door has a switch (5) tooperate the passenger’s window.

81A009

To open a window, push the top part of theswitch and to close the window lift up thetop part of the switch.

The driver’s window has auto-down andauto-up features for added convenience(at toll booths or drive-through restaurants,for example). This means the driver canopen or close the window without holdingthe window switch in the down or up posi-tion. Press down or lift up the driver’s win-dow switch completely and release it. Tostop the window before it reaches the full-down or full-up position, pull up or pushdown the switch briefly.Lock switch

64MS027

The driver’s door also has a lock switch forthe passenger’s window(s). When youpush in the lock switch, the passenger’swindow(s) cannot be raised or lowered byoperating any of the switches (2), (3), (4)or (5). To restore normal operation, releasethe lock switch by pushing again.

(1)

(2)

(4)

(3)

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(5)

CLOSE

OPEN

EXAMPLE

2-19

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:If you drive with one of the rear windowsopen, you may hear a loud sound causedby air vibration. To reduce the sound, openthe driver’s or front passenger’s window, ornarrow the rear window opening.

Pinching Prevention FunctionThe driver’s window is equipped with thepinching prevention function. The functiondetects a foreign object caught in the win-dow while being closed by the “auto-up”feature, which you can close the windowwithout holding the window switch in the“UP” position, and stops the window clos-ing to prevent damage.

NOTE:Even if you cannot close the window by theauto-up feature because there may besomething wrong with the pinching preven-tion function, you can close the window byholding the window switch in the up posi-tion.If you drive in extreme off-road condition,the pinching prevention function may oper-ate accidentally because the window reactto vehicle jolting.The Pinching Prevention Function Ini-tializationWhen you disconnect and re-connect thebattery or replace the fuse, the function willbe deactivated. In this condition, the auto-down feature will be deactivated, while theauto-up feature may remain being acti-vated. The pinching prevention functionneeds to be initialized.To initialize the pinching prevention func-tion, use the following procedure:1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position or press the engine switch tochange the ignition mode to “ON”.

2) Open the driver’s window fully by hold-ing the window switch in the “DOWN”position.

3) Close the driver’s window by holdingthe switch in the “UP” position, andkeep holding the switch for 2 secondsafter the window fully closed.

4) Check the driver’s window if the auto-down/up feature work.

WARNING• You should always lock the pas-

senger’s window operation whenthere are children in the vehicle.Children can be seriously injured ifthey get part of their body caughtby the window during operation.

• To avoid injuring an occupant bywindow entrapment, be sure nopart of the occupant’s body such ashands or head is in the path of theelectric windows when closingthem.

• Always remove the ignition key ortake the keyless push start systemremote controller with you whenleaving the vehicle even if only fora short time. Also do not leave chil-dren alone in a parked vehicle.Unattended children may operatethe electric window switches andget trapped by the window.

WARNINGTo avoid injuring an occupant by win-dow entrapment, be sure no part ofthe occupant’s body such as handsor head is in the path of the electricwindow when closing it.The function may not detect theobject depending on size, hardness,and position of the object caught bythe closing window.

CAUTION• The pinching prevention function

does not act while you are holdingthe window switch in the “UP”position.

• The pinching prevention functionmay not detect an object caught inthe window just before the windowis fully closed.

2-20

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

If the auto-down/up feature would not workafter initialization, there might be some-thing wrong with the pinching preventionfunction. Have your vehicle inspected byan authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

MirrorsInside Rearview Mirror

68LMT0205

68LMT0206

(2) Day driving(3) Night driving

You can adjust the inside rearview mirrorby hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, setthe selector tab (1) to the day position,then move the mirror up, down or sidewaysby hand to obtain the best view.When driving at night, you can move theselector tab to the night position to reduceglare from the headlights of vehiclesbehind you.

WARNINGWhenever you disconnect and recon-nect the battery or replace the fuse,the pinching prevention functionneeds to be initialized. The pinching prevention function willnot be activated until the initializationcomplete.

(1)

(2) (3)

WARNING• Always adjust the mirror with the

selector set to the day position.• Only use the night position if it is

necessary to reduce glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you.Be aware that in this position youmay not be able to see someobjects that could be seen in theday position.

2-21

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Auto Dimming Rearview Mirror (if equipped)

57L30019

You can adjust the auto dimming rearviewmirror by hand so you can see to the rearof your vehicle in the mirror. This rearviewmirror has a function of automaticallyreducing glare from the lights of vehiclesbehind you. The function works when theignition mode has been changed to “ON”by pressing the engine switch.• The mirror is always set to the automatic

dimming mode when the engine switchis in the “ON” mode.

• When the “AUTO” switch (2) is pushed,the green indicator (1) is lit, indicatingthat the mirror is set to the automaticdimming mode. To cancel the automaticdimming mode, push the “AUTO” switch(2); the indicator (1) then goes out.

• The auto dimming rearview mirror isautomatically deactivated while the gear-shift lever is in the “R” position.

57L30020

Outside Rearview MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors so youcan just see the side of your vehicle in themirrors.

64MS028

The switch to control the electric mirrors islocated on the driver’s door panel. You canadjust the mirrors when the ignition switchis in the “ACC” or “ON” position, or the igni-tion mode is “ACC” or “ON”. To adjust themirrors:1) Move the selector switch to the left or

right to select the mirror you wish toadjust.

(2)(1)

WARNINGDo not touch or cover the sensor (3)since this may impair normal opera-tion of the system. Blocking glarefrom the sensor with an object suchas a shade, sticker, accessory or bag-gage may also impair proper opera-tion of the system.

NOTICEDo not hook anything heavy on themirror, or the mirror may break underthe weight.

(3)

(3)

WARNINGBe careful when judging the size ordistance of a vehicle or other objectseen in the side convex mirror. Beaware that objects look smaller andappear farther away than when seenin a flat mirror.

(3)

(4)

(2)

(1)

(1)

(3)(2)

(4)

L R

2-22

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

2) Press the outer part of the switch thatcorresponds to the direction in whichyou wish to move the mirror.

3) Return the selector switch to the centerposition to help prevent unintendedadjustment.

Outside Rearview Mirrors Folding Switch (if equipped)

64MS029

You can fold the mirrors when you park thevehicle in a narrow space. When the igni-tion switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”,push the folding switch (1) to fold andunfold the mirrors. Make sure the mirrorsare completely unfolded before you startdriving.

CAUTIONMoving mirrors can pinch and injurea hand. Do not allow any one’s handto get near the mirrors when foldingand unfolding the mirrors.

(1)

EXAMPLE

2-23

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the driver’sseat or seatback while driving. Theseat or seatback could move unex-pectedly, causing loss of control.Make sure that the driver’s seat andseatback are properly adjustedbefore you start driving.

WARNINGTo avoid excessive seat belt slack,which reduces the effectiveness ofthe seat belts as a safety device,make sure that the seats are adjustedbefore the seat belts are fastened.

WARNINGAll seatbacks should always be in anupright position when driving, or seatbelt effectiveness may be reduced.Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-mum protection when seatbacks arein the upright position.

64MS154

(1)(2)(3)

2-24

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Seat position adjustment lever (1)Pull the lever up and slide the seat.Seatback angle adjustment lever (2)Pull the lever up and move the seatback.Seat height adjustment lever (3) (ifequipped)Pull the lever up to raise the seat. Push thelever down to lower the seat.After adjustment, try to move the seat andseatback forward and rearward to ensurethat it is securely latched.

Head Restraints

80J001

Head restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in the caseof an accident. Adjust the head restraint tothe position which places the center of thehead restraint closest to the top of yourears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-sengers, adjust the head restraint as highas possible.

NOTE:It may be necessary to recline the seat-back to provide enough overhead clear-ance to remove the head restraint.

Front

64MS163

To raise the front head restraint, pullupward on the restraint until it clicks. Tolower the restraint, push down on therestraint while holding in the lock lever. If ahead restraint must be removed (for clean-ing, replacement, etc.), push in the locklever and pull the head restraint all the wayout.

WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.

EXAMPLE

2-25

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Rear SeatsSeat Adjustment

.

WARNINGTo avoid excessive seat belt slack,which reduces the effectiveness ofthe seat belts as a safety device,make sure that the seats are adjustedbefore the seat belts are fastened.

WARNINGAll seatbacks should always be in anupright position when driving, or seatbelt effectiveness may be reduced.Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-mum protection when seatbacks arein the upright position.

64MS155

(1)

UNLOCK

LOCK

RED

EXAMPLE

2-26

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Seatback angle adjustment lever (1) (if equipped)Pull the lever up and move the seatback.After adjustment, try to move the seatbackforward and rearward to ensure that it issecurely latched.

Head RestraintsHead restraints are designed to helpreduce the risk of neck injuries in the caseof an accident.

NOTE:It may be necessary to fold forward theseatback to provide enough overheadclearance to remove the head restraint.Adjust the head restraint to the positionwhich places the center of the headrestraint closest to the top of your ears. Ifthis is not possible for very tall passengers,adjust the head restraint as high as possi-ble.

Rear

64MS156

To raise the rear head restraint, pullupward on the restraint until it clicks. Tolower the restraint, push down on therestraint while holding in the lock lever. If ahead restraint must be removed (for clean-ing, replacement, etc.), push in the locklever and pull the head restraint all the wayout.When installing a child restraint system,raise the head restraint to the most upperposition.

Folding Rear Seat (s)The rear seat (s) of your vehicle can befolded forward to provide additional cargospace.To fold the rear seat (s) forward:1) Lower the head restraint fully.

64MS157

2) Pull the release lever on the top of eachsplit seat, and fold the seatback (s) for-ward.

CAUTIONAfter securing the rear seatback,make sure that it is locked securely. Ifit is not, red will appear beside thelever.

WARNING• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.

EXAMPLE

NOTICEAfter folding the rear seatback for-ward, do not allow any foreign mate-rial to enter the lock opening. Thismay cause damage to the inside of thelock and prevent the seatback frombeing locked securely.

EXAMPLE

2-27

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

To return the seat to the normal position,follow the procedure below.

64MS145

Raise the seatback until it locks into place.

64MS201

The rear seatback (3) will lock in two posi-tions (1) and (2). You can lock the rearseatback in position (2) to increase the lug-gage compartment area.

After returning the seat, try to move theseatback forward and rearward to ensurethat it is securely latched.

WARNINGIf you need to carry cargo in the pas-senger compartment with the rearseat back folded forward, be sure tosecure the cargo or it may be thrownabout, causing injury. Never pilecargo higher than the seatbacks.

CAUTIONWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, be careful thatyour finger is not caught between thelock and the striker.

NOTICEWhen returning the rear seatback tothe normal position, make sure thatthere is nothing around the striker.Any foreign materials prevent theseatback from being locked securely.

UNLOCK

LOCK

RED

EXAMPLE

(2) (1)

(3)EXAMPLE

CAUTIONDo not put your hand into the rearseatback lock opening, or your fingermay get caught and be injured.

CAUTIONAfter securing the rear seatback,make sure that it is locked securely. Ifit is not, red will appear beside therelease lever.

2-28

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems

65D231S

65D606

NOTICE• When returning the rear seatback

to the normal position, do not allowany foreign material to enter thelock opening. This may prevent theseatback from being lockedsecurely.

• When returning the rear seatbackto the normal position, be sure tohandle it carefully by hand to avoidany damage to the lock itself. Donot push it by using some materialor by applying excessive force.

• As the lock is designed exclusivelyfor securing the rear seatback, donot use it for any other purpose.Incorrect use of it may cause dam-age to the inside of the lock andprevent the seatback from beinglocked securely.

WARNINGWear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the frontal crash protection offeredby seat belts. The driver and all pas-sengers must be properly restrainedby wearing seat belts at all times,whether or not an air bag is mountedat their seating position, to minimizethe risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a crash.

WARNING• Never allow persons to ride in the

cargo area of a vehicle. In the eventof an accident, there is a muchgreater risk of injury for personswho are not riding in a seat withtheir seat belt securely fastened.

• Seat belts should always beadjusted as follows:– the lap portion of the belt should

be worn low across the pelvis,not across the waist.

– the shoulder straps should beworn on the outside shoulderonly, and never under the arm.

– the shoulder straps should beaway from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

(Continued)

Above the pelvis

2-29

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

65D201 65D199

WARNING(Continued)• Seat belts should never be worn

with the straps twisted and shouldbe adjusted as tightly as is com-fortable to provide the protectionfor which they have been designed.A slack belt will provide less pro-tection than one which is snug.

• Make sure that each seat beltbuckle is inserted into the properbuckle catch. It is possible to crossthe buckles in the rear seat.

(Continued)

Across the pelvis

WARNING(Continued)• Pregnant women should use seat

belts, although specific recommen-dations about driving should bemade by the woman’s medical advi-sor. Remember that the lap portionof the belt should be worn as lowas possible across the hips, asshown in the diagram.

• Do not wear your seat belt overhard or breakable objects in yourpockets or on your clothing. If anaccident occurs, objects such asglasses, pens, etc. under the seatbelt can cause injury.

(Continued)

as low as possible across the hips

WARNING(Continued)• Never use the same seat belt on

more than one occupant and neverattach a seat belt over an infant orchild being held on an occupant’slap. Such seat belt use could causeserious injury in the event of anaccident.

• Periodically inspect seat beltassemblies for excessive wear anddamage. Seat belts should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated, or damagedin any way. It is essential to replacethe entire seat belt assembly after ithas been worn in a severe impact,even if damage to the assembly isnot obvious.

• Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in the rearseat.

• Infants and small children shouldnever be transported unless theyare properly restrained. Restraintsystems for infants and small chil-dren can be purchased locally andshould be used. Make sure that thesystem you purchase meets appli-cable safety standards. Read andfollow all the directions providedby the manufacturer.

(Continued)

2-30

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Lap-Shoulder BeltEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR)The seat belt has an emergency lockingretractor (ELR), which is designed to lockthe seat belt only during a sudden stop orimpact. It also may lock if you pull the beltacross your body very quickly. If this hap-pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, thenpull the belt across your body more slowly.Safety reminder

60A038

60A040

To reduce the risk of sliding under the beltduring a collision, position the lap portionof the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fitby pulling the shoulder portion of the beltupward through the latch plate. The lengthof the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itselfto allow freedom of movement.

WARNING(Continued)• For children, if the shoulder belt

irritates the neck or face, move thechild closer to the center of thevehicle.

• Avoid contamination of seat beltwebbing by polishes, oils, chemi-cals, and particularly battery acid.Cleaning may safely be carried outusing mild soap and water.

• Do not insert any items such ascoins, clips, etc. into the seat beltbuckles, and be careful not to spillliquids into these parts. If foreignmaterials get into a seat beltbuckle, the seat belt may not workproperly.

• All seatbacks should always be inan upright position when driving,or seat belt effectiveness may bereduced. Seat belts are designed tooffer maximum protection whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.

Sit up straight and fully back

Low on hips

Low on hips

2-31

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

All Seat Belts Except Rear CenterAll seat belts except rear center are thelap-shoulder belt.

60A036

To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight andwell back in the seat, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your bodyand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a click.

60A039

To unfasten the seat belt, push the buttonon the buckle and retract the belt slowlywhile attaching a hand to the belt or/andthe latch plate.

Rear Center Seat BeltRear center seat belt is the lap belt.To fasten the belt, pull the latch plateattached to the seat belt across your hipsand press it straight into the buckle untilyou hear a click. To reduce the risk of slid-ing under the belt during a collision, posi-tion the belt across your lap as low on yourhips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit.

80JS028

To tighten the belt, pull the free end of thebelt across alongside the lap strap.

TO TIGHTEN

Low on hips

2-32

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

80JS029

To lengthen, release the latch plate fromthe buckle, pull the latch plate (adjuster) inthe direction of the arrow, at right angles tothe belt. The latch plate should then berefitted into the buckle and the belt tight-ened as previously described.To unfasten the belt, press the release but-ton on the buckle catch.

80JS031

NOTE:To identify the center seat belt buckle andlatch plate in the rear seat, “CENTER” ismarked on the buckle and latch plate of thecenter lap belt. The buckles are designedso a latch plate cannot be inserted into thewrong buckle.Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder

64MS045

(1) Driver’s seat belt reminder lightWhen the driver doesn’t buckle his or herseat belt, with the ignition switch in the“ON” position or the ignition mode “ON”,the driver’s seat belt reminder light in theinstrument cluster will blink and a buzzerwill sound as a reminder to the driver tobuckle his or her sear belt. For moredetails, refer to the explanation below.If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckledwhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thereminder works as follows:

1. The driver’s seat belt reminder light willcome on.

2. After the vehicle’s speed has reachedabout 15 km/h, the driver’s seat beltreminder light will blink and a buzzerwill sound for about 95 seconds.

3. After step 2) has finished, the reminderlight will remain on until the driver’s seatbelt is buckled.

If the driver has buckled his or her seat beltand later unbuckles the seat belt, the seatbelt reminder system will be activated fromstep 1) or step 2) according to vehicle’sspeed. When the vehicle’s speed is belowabout 15 km/h, the reminder will start fromstep 1). When the vehicle’s speed is aboveabout 15 km/, the reminder will start fromstep 2).The reminder will be automatically can-celed when the driver’s seat belt is buckledor the ignition switch is turned off, ignitionmode is switched to OFF position.

TO LOOSEN

Right angle

(1)EXAMPLE

WARNINGIt is absolutely essential that thedriver and passengers wear their seatbelts at all times. Persons who arenot wearing seat belts have a muchgreater risk of injury if an accidentoccurs. Make a regular habit of buck-ling your seat belt before putting thekey in the ignition or pressing theengine switch.

2-33

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster

64J198

Adjust the shoulder anchor height so thatthe shoulder belt rides on the center of theoutboard shoulder. To move upward, slidethe anchor up. To move downward, slidethe anchor down while pulling the lockknob out. After adjustment, make sure thatthe anchor is securely locked.

Seat Belt Inspection

65D209S

Periodically inspect the seat belts to makesure they work properly and are not dam-aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latchplates, retractors, anchorages, and guideloops. Replace any seat belts which do notwork properly or are damaged.

Child Restraint Systems

60G332S

Infant restraint - rear seat only

80JC007

WARNINGBe sure that the shoulder belt is posi-tioned on the center of the outsideshoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not fall-ing off your shoulder. Misadjustmentof the belt could reduce the effective-ness of the safety belt in a crash.

EXAMPLE

WARNINGBe sure to inspect all seat beltassemblies after any collision. Anyseat belt assembly which was in useduring a collision (other than a veryminor one) should be replaced, evenif damage to the assembly is notobvious. Any seat belt assemblywhich was not in use during a colli-sion should be replaced if it does notfunction properly, it is damaged inany way or the seat belt pretension-ers were activated (that is, if the frontair bags were activated).

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-34

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Child restraint

80JC016

Booster seat

80JC008

MARUTI SUZUKI highly recommends thatyou use a child restraint system to restraininfants and small children. Many differenttypes of child restraint systems are avail-able; make sure that the restraint systemyou select meets applicable safety stan-dards.

All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by either seatbelts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-shoulder belts). MARUTI SUZUKI recom-mends that child restraint systems beinstalled on the rear seat as per the ChildRestraint System table in this section.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in rearseating positions than in front seating posi-tions.NOTE:Observe any statutory regulation aboutchild restraints.

58MS030

65D608

65D609

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

WARNINGDo not install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the passenger’s front air baginflates, a child in a rear-facing childrestraint could be killed or severelyinjured. The back of a rear-facingchild restraint would be too close tothe inflating air bag.

WARNINGIf you install a child restraint systemin the rear seat, slide the front seatfar enough forward so that the child’sfeet do not touch the front seatback.This will help avoid injury to the childin the event of an accident.

2-35

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts

NOTE:If the most upper position head restraintinterferes a child restraint system and pre-vents the child restraint system from beinginstalled securely, remove the headrestraint.Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-gage compartment so it will not inconve-nience the occupants.ELR type belt

80JC021

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

Make sure that the seat belt is securelylatched.Try to move the child restraint system in alldirections to make sure it is securelyinstalled.

Installation with a Lap Belt

60G132

Install your child restraint system accord-ing to the instructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.To lengthen or tighten the belt, refer to the“Lap-belt” item in this “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section. Aftermaking sure that the seat belt is securelylatched, try moving the child restraint sys-tem in all directions, to make sure it issecurely installed. If you need to tightenthe belt, pull the free end of the webbing.

WARNINGChildren could be endangered in acrash if their child restraint systemsare not properly secured in the vehi-cle. When installing a child restraintsystem, be sure to follow the instruc-tions below. Be sure to secure thechild in the restraint system accord-ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

WARNINGIn an accident or sudden stop, therear seat armrest (if equipped) couldfall forward. If there is a child in arear-facing child restraint in the rearcenter seating position, the fallingarmrest could injure the child. Do notinstall a rear-facing child restraint inthe rear center seating position.

NOTICEBefore installing a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat, raise the headrestraint to the most upper position.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

Pull to tighten

2-36

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Installation with ISOFIX type anchorages (if equipped)

64MM02001

Your vehicle is equipped with the loweranchorages in the rear seat outboard seat-ing positions for securing a ISOFIX type ofchild restraints with the connecting bars.The lower anchorages are located wherethe rear of the seat cushion meets the bot-tom of the seatback.

Install the ISOFIX type child restraint sys-tem according to the instructions providedby the child restraint system manufacturer.After installation, try moving the childrestraint system in all directions especiallyforward to check that connecting bars aresecurely latched to the anchorages.

84MM00252

Your vehicle is equipped with the top tetheranchorages. Use the top tether strap of thechild restraint according to the instructionsprovided by the child restraint system man-ufacturer.

Here is a general instruction:

NOTE:Stow the removed head restraint in the lug-gage compartment so it will not causeinconvenience to the occupants.

WARNINGInstall the ISOFIX type of childrestraint(s) in the only outboard seat-ing positions, not in the central posi-tion for the rear seat.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

CAUTIONAdjust the height of the rear headrestraint or remove it for fitting thechild restraint, as necessary. How-ever, if a booster cushion notequipped with the head restraint isfitted, the rear seat head restraintshould not be removed. If the rearhead restraint is removed for fittingthe child restraint, you need to installit again after removing the childrestraint.If the child restraint is fitted improp-erly, a child sitting in it could beinjured in a crash.

2-37

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

78F114

1) Place the child restraint in the rear seat,inserting the connecting bars to theanchorages between the seat cushionand the seatback.

68LM268

2) Use your hands to carefully align theconnecting bar tips with the anchor-ages. Take care not to pinch your fin-gers.

54G184

3) Push the child restraint toward the anchor-ages so that the connecting bar tips arepartially hooked to the anchorages. Useyour hands to confirm the position.

54G185

4) Grasp the front of the child restraint andpush the child restraint forcefully tolatch the connecting bars. Check thatthey are securely latched by trying tomove the child restraint system in alldirections, especially forward.

5) Attach the top tether strap referring to“Installation of child restraint with toptether” section below.When you put your child in the childrestraint system, appropriately slide thefront seat forward not to touch a part ofyour child’s body.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

NOTICEWhen installing a child restraint sys-tem to the rear seat, adjust the frontseat position so that the front seatdoes not interfere with the childrestraint system.

EXAMPLE

2-38

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Installation of child restraint with top tether (if equipped)

68PM00247

Some child restraint systems require theuse of a top tether strap. Top tether anchor-age brackets are provided in your vehicle atthe locations shown in the illustrations.The number of the top tether anchoragebrackets provided in your vehicle dependson the vehicle specification. Install the childrestraint system as follows:

1) Remove the luggage compartment cover(if equipped).

2) Secure the child restraint on the rearseat using the procedure describedabove for securing a restraint systemthat does not require a top tether strap.

3) Hook the top tether strap to the toptether anchorage bracket and tightenthe top tether strap according to theinstructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer. Attachthe top tether strap to the correspond-ing top tether anchorage bracketlocated directly behind the childrestraint. Do not attach the top tetherstrap to the luggage restraint loops (ifequipped).

54P000264

4) When routing the top tether strap, passthe top tether strap as shown in theillustration. (Refer to “Head restraints”section for details on how to remove thehead restraint.)

5) Check that cargo does not interferewith routing of the top tether strap.

EXAMPLEFront

WARNINGDo not attach the child restraint toptether strap to the luggage restraintloops (if equipped). Incorrectlyattached top tether strap will reducethe intended effectiveness of thechild restraint system.

NOTICEWhen installing a child restraint sys-tem to the rear seat, adjust the frontseat position so that the front seatdoes not interfere with the childrestraint system.

EXAMPLE

2-39

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Child Restraint System for IndiaChild Restraint

The suitability of each passenger’s seat position for carriage of children and fitting of child restraint system is shown in the table below. Whenever you carry children up to 12 years of age, properly use the child restraints which conform to AIS 072, the standard for child restraints, referring to the table.

MASS GROUP

Seating position (or other site)

Front Passenger

Rear Outboard

Rear Centre

Intermediate Outboard

Intermediate Centre

Group 0Up to 10 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group 0+Up to 13 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group I9 to 18 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group II15 to 25 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Group III22 to 36 kg X U X N.A. N.A.

Key of letters to be inserted in the above table:U =Suitable for ‘universal’ category restraints approved for use in this mass groupX =Seat position not suitable for children in this mass groupN.A = Seat position not available for children in this mass group. NOTE: ‘universal’ is the category in the AIS 072. : ‘Outboard’ indicates window side seat.

2-40

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Seat Belt Pretensioner System (if equipped)

63J269

To determine if your vehicle is equippedwith a seat belt pretensioner system at thefront seating positions, check the label onthe front seat belt at the bottom part. If theletters “p” and/or “PRE” appear as illus-trated, your vehicle is equipped with theseat belt pretensioner system. You can use

the pretensioner seat belts in the samemanner as ordinary seat belts.Read this section and the “SupplementalRestraint System (air bags)” section tolearn more about the pretensioner system.The seat belt pretensioner system workswith the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM (Air Bags). The crash sensorsand the electronic controller of the air bagsystem also control the seat belt preten-sioners. The pretensioners are triggeredonly when there is a frontal crash severeenough to trigger the air bags and the seatbelts are fastened. For precautions andgeneral information including servicing thepretensioner system, refer to the “Supple-mental Restraint System (air bags)” sec-tion in addition to this “Seat BeltPretensioner System” section, and followall those precautions.The pretensioner is located in each frontseat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-pant’s body more snugly in the event of afrontal crash. The retractors will remainlocked after the pretensioners are acti-vated. Upon activation, some noise willoccur and some smoke may be released.These conditions are not harmful and donot indicate a fire in the vehicle.The driver and all passengers must beproperly restrained by wearing seat beltsat all times, whether or not a pretensioneris equipped at their seating position, to

minimize the risk of severe injury or deathin the event of a crash.Sit fully back in the seat; sit up straight; donot lean forward or sideways. Adjust thebelt so the lap portion of the belt is wornlow across the pelvis, not across the waist.Please refer to the “Seat Adjustment” sec-tion and the instructions and precautionsabout the seat belts in this “Seat Belts andChild Restraint Systems” section for detailson proper seat and seat belt adjustments.Please note that the pretensioners alongwith the air bags will activate in severefrontal collisions. They are not designed toactivate in side impacts, rear impacts, roll-overs, or minor frontal collisions. The pre-tensioners can be activated only once. Ifthe pretensioners are activated (that is, ifthe air bags are activated), have the pre-tensioner system serviced by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon aspossible.If the air bag light on the instrument clusterdoes not blink or come on briefly when theignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to ON, stays onfor more than 10 seconds, or comes onwhile driving, the pretensioner system orthe air bag system may not work properly.Have both systems inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop as soon aspossible.Service on or around the pretensioner sys-tem components or wiring must be per-formed only by an authorised Maruti

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes your Vehicle’s SEAT BELTPRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Pleaseread and follow ALL these instruc-tions carefully to minimize your riskof severe injury or death.

and/or

Label

EXAMPLE

2-41

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Suzuki workshop who is specially trained.Improper service could result in unin-tended activation of pretensioners or couldrender the pretensioner inoperative. Eitherof these two conditions may result in per-sonal injury.To prevent damage or unintended activa-tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-tery is disconnected and the ignition switchhas been in the “LOCK” position or theignition mode has been LOCK (OFF) for atleast 90 seconds before performing anyelectrical service work on your vehicle. Donot touch pretensioner system compo-nents or wiring. The wires are wrappedwith yellow tape or yellow tubing, and thecouplers are yellow. When scrapping yourVehicle, ask your authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop body repair shop, or scrap yardfor assistance.

2-42

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-mental Restraint System consisting of thefollowing components in addition to a lap-shoulder belt at each seating position.

1. Driver’s front air bag module (ifequipped)

2. Front passenger’s front air bag mod-ule (if equipped)

3. Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)4. Air bag controller5. Forward crash sensor (if equipped)

WARNINGThis section of the owner’s manualdescribes the protection provided byyour Vehicle’s SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags). Please read and follow ALL theseinstructions carefully to minimizeyour risk of severe injury or death inthe event of a collision.

1

3

3 4

2

5

1

3

3 4

2

5

EXAMPLE

76MH026

2-43

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

AIR BAG light

63J030

If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus-ter does not blink or come on when theignition switch is first turned to the “ON”position, or the ignition mode is firstchanged to “ON”, or the air bag light stayson, or comes on while driving, the air bagsystem (or the seat belt pretensioner sys-tem (if equipped) may not work properly.Have the air bag system inspected by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop assoon as possible.

Air bag symbol (if equipped) meaning

72M00150

You may find this label on the sun visor.

Front Air Bags (if equipped)

63J113

Front air bags are designed to inflate insevere frontal collisions when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position or the ignitionmode is ON.Front air bags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts, side impacts, rollovers orminor frontal collisions, since they wouldoffer no protection in those types of acci-dents. Remember, since an air bagdeploys only one time during an accident,seat belts are needed to restrain occu-pants from further movements during theaccident.Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitutefor seat belts. To maximize your protection,ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Beaware that no system can prevent all pos-sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

WARNINGAn air bag supplements, or adds to,the crash protection offered by seatbelts. The driver and all passengersmust be properly restrained by wear-ing seat belts at all times, whether ornot an air bag is mounted at theirseating position, to minimize the riskof severe injury or death in the eventof a crash.

WARNINGNEVER use a rearward facing childrestraint on a seat protected by anACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATHor SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILDcan occur.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

2-44

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Driver’s front air bag (if equipped)

61M0020

Front passenger’s front air bag (if equipped)

64MS117

The driver’s front air bag is located behindthe center pad of the steering wheel andthe front passenger’s front air bag islocated behind the passenger’s side of thedashboard.

The words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded intothe air bag covers to identify the location ofthe air bags.

58MS030

Please refer to the “Seat Belts and ChildRestraint Systems” section in this sectionfor details on securing your child.

Conditions of front air bags deployment(inflation)

80J097

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform at vehiclespeed of more than about 25 km/h (15mph)

80J098E

• In collisions such as above at an angleof about 30 degrees (1) or less from thefront

Conditions of front air bags may inflateReceiving a strong impact to the lowerbody of your vehicle, the front air bags willinflate in many cases.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE WARNINGDo not install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’sseat. If the passenger’s front air baginflates, a child in a rear-facing childrestraint could be killed or severelyinjured. The back of a rear-facingchild restraint would be too close tothe inflating air bag.

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

2-45

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

80J099

• Hitting a curb or medial strip

80J100E

• Falling into a deep hole or ditch

80J101

• Landing hard or falling

Front air bags may inflate in a strongimpact

80J120

• Collision from the rear

80J119

• Collision from the side

80J110

• Vehicle rolloverFront air bags may not inflateThe front air bags may not inflate when theimpact is absorbed since the collision

object moved, vehicle body deformed, orcollision angle was greater than about 30degrees from the front.

80J102

• Approximately 50 km/h (30 mph) orlower speed frontal collision to a stoppedvehicle

80J103

• Collision in which front of your vehiclegoes under the bed of a truck etc.

80J104

• Collision with a utility pole or stumpage

2-46

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

80J105E

• Collision with a fixed wall or guardrail atan angle of greater than about 30degrees (1) from the front

80J106

• In frontal collisions with a fixed wall thatdoes not move or deform at vehiclespeed of less than about 25 km/h (15mph)

80J107

• Offset collision between two vehicles.

How the System WorksIn a frontal collision, the crash sensors willdetect rapid deceleration, and if the control-ler judges that the deceleration representsa severe frontal crash, the controller willtrigger the inflators. The inflators inflate theappropriate air bags with nitrogen or argongas. The inflated air bags provide a cushionfor your head and upper body. The air baginflates and deflates so quickly that youmay not even realize that it has activated.The air bag will neither hinder your view normake it harder to exit the vehicle.Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefullyin order to reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries. However, an unavoidable con-sequence of the quick inflation is that the airbag may irritate bare skin, such as the facialarea against a front air bag. Also, uponinflation, a loud noise will occur and somepowder and smoke will be released. Theseconditions are not harmful and do not indi-cate a fire in the vehicle. Be aware, how-ever, that some air bag components may behot for a while after inflation.A seat belt helps keep you in the properposition for maximum protection when anair bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far backas possible while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. Sit fully back in your seat; sit upstraight; do not lean over the steering wheelor dashboard. Front occupants should notlean on or sleep against the door. Pleaserefer to the “Front Seat” section and the“Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems”section in this section for details on properseat and seat belt adjustments.

65D610

(1)(1)

WARNING• The driver should not lean over the

steering wheel. The front passen-ger should not rest his or her bodyagainst the dashboard, or other-wise get too close to the dash-board. In these situations, the out-of-position occupant would be tooclose to an inflating air bag, andmay suffer severe injury.

• Do not attach any objects to, orplace any objects over, the steeringwheel or dashboard. Do not placeany objects between the air bagand the driver or front passenger.These objects may interfere with airbag operation or may be propelledby the air bag in the event of acrash. Either of these conditionsmay cause severe injury.

2-47

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Note that even though your vehicle may bemoderately damaged in a collision, the col-lision may not have been severe enough totrigger the front air bags to inflate. If yourvehicle sustains ANY front-end damage,have the air bag system inspected by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop toensure it is in proper working order.Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosticmodule which records information aboutthe air bag system if the air bags deploy ina crash. The module records informationabout overall system status, which sensorsactivated the deployment.

Servicing the air bag systemIf the air bags inflate, have the air bagsand related components replaced by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop assoon as possible.If your vehicle ever gets in deep water andthe driver’s floor is submerged, the air bagcontroller could be damaged. If it does,have the air bag system inspected by theauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop assoon as possible.Special procedures are required for servic-ing or replacing an air bag. For that rea-son, only an authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop should be allowed to service orreplace your air bags. Please remind any-one who services your Vehicle that it hasair bags.

Service on or around air bag componentsor wiring must be performed only by anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop.Improper service could result in unin-

tended air bag deployment or could renderthe air bag inoperative. Either of these twoconditions may result in severe injury.To prevent damage or unintended inflationof the air bag system, be sure the batteryis disconnected and the ignition switch hasbeen in the “LOCK” position or the ignitionmode has been LOCK (OFF) for at least90 seconds before performing any electri-cal service work on your Vehicle. Do nottouch air bag system components or wires.The wires are wrapped with yellow tape oryellow tubing, and the couplers are yellowfor easy identification.Scrapping a vehicle that has an uninflatedair bag can be hazardous. Ask your autho-rised Maruti Suzuki body repair shop orscrap yard for help with disposal.

2-48

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Instrument Cluster1. Speedometer2. Tachometer3. Fuel gauge4. Temperature gauge5. Information display6. Warning and indicator lights

64MS166

5 36 4

2 6 1

65 36 4

2 6 1

6

2-49

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

TachometerThe tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge

61MM0A154

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thisgauge gives an approximate indication ofthe amount of fuel in the fuel tank. “F”stands for full and “E” stands for empty.If the indicator gets off the graduation of“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank assoon as possible.NOTE:The indicator moves a little depending onroad conditions (for example, slope orcurve) and driving conditions because offuel moving in the tank.If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,fill the fuel tank immediately.Refer to “Low Fuel Warning Light” in“Warning and Indicator Lights” in thissection for details.

The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler lidis located on the left side of the vehicle.

NOTICENever drive the vehicle with theengine revving in the red zone orsevere engine damage can result.Keep the engine speed below the redzone even when downshifting to alower gear position.Refer to “Downshifting maximumallowable speeds” in the “OPERAT-ING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

(2)

(1) EXAMPLE

2-50

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Temperature Gauge

64MS046

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is “ON”, thisgauge indicates the engine coolant tem-perature. Under normal driving conditions,the indicator should stay within the normal,acceptable temperature range between“H” and “C”. If the indicator approaches“H”, overheating is indicated. Follow theinstructions for engine overheating in the“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section.

Brightness Control

61MM0A156

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, the instrument cluster lights comeon. Your vehicle has a system to automaticallydim the brightness of the instrument panellights when the position lights or headlightsare on. You can change the brightness of theinstrument panel lights regardless ofwhether the position lights or headlightsare off or on.To increase the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the indicator selec-tor knob (1) clockwise. To reduce the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights, turn the indicator selectorknob (1) counterclockwise.

NOTE:• If you do not turn the knob for more than

5 seconds while activating the bright-ness control, the brightness control dis-play will be canceled automatically.

• When you reconnect the battery, thebrightness of the instrument panel lightswill be reinitialized. Readjust the bright-ness according to your preference.

NOTE:If you select the high brightness level whenthe position lights or headlights are on, theinstrument panel lights are not dimmed.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenengine overheating is indicated canresult in severe engine damage.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLEWARNING

If you attempt to adjust the bright-ness of the instrument panel lightswhile driving, you could lose controlof the vehicle.Do not attempt to adjust the bright-ness of the instrument panel lightswhile driving.

2-51

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Information DisplayThe information display is shown when theignition switch is in the “ON” position or theignition mode is ON.

64MS183

(1) Information display

64MS184

(2) Indicator selector knob(3) Trip meter selector knob

The information display shows the follow-ing information.

Display (A)ClockDisplay (B)ThermometerDisplay (C)Warning and indicator messages / Fuel consumption / Driving range / Average speedDisplay (D)Trip meterDisplay (E)Odometer

64MS181

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode toON, the message shown in the above illus-tration will appear on the display for sev-eral seconds.Some warning and indicator messagesmay appear on the display when the igni-tion switch is in the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-tion, or the ignition mode is ACC or LOCK(OFF).

ClockThe display (A) shows the time.To set the clock, follow the “Setting mode”instructions in this section.

ThermometerThe display (B) shows the thermometer.The thermometer indicates the outsidetemperature.

61MM0A160

If the outside temperature nears freezing,the message shown in the above illustra-tion will appear on the display.NOTE:The outside temperature indication is notthe actual outside temperature when driv-ing at low speed, or when stopped.

(1)

(B)

(C)

(A)

(D)(E)

(3)

(2)

EXAMPLE

64MS0-74E

Fuel Consumption / Driving Range / Average SpeedWhen there are no warning or indicator messages on the display (C), you can select oneof the following indications to appear on the display: instantaneous fuel consumption,average fuel consumption, driving range, average speed or no indication.

64MS058

(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption(b) Average fuel consumption(c) Driving range(d) Average speed(e) No indication

To switch the display indication, push the indicator selector knob (2) quickly.

(a) (b) (c)

(d)(e)EXAMPLE

NOTE:The value of fuel consumption, drivingrange and average speed shown in thedisplay are affected by conditions such asthe following;• road condition• surrounding traffic condition• driving condition• vehicle condition• a malfunction which causes the malfunc-

tion indicator light to come on or blink

2-5/

BEFORE DRIVING

2-53

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Instantaneous fuel consumptionThe display shows instantaneous fuel con-sumption with a bar graph only when thevehicle is moving.NOTE:• The display does not show the bar graph

unless the vehicle is moving.• Depending on the vehicle’s specification,

the fuel consumption units of initial set-ting are indicated as L/100km, km/L orMPG.

• For “L/100km” or “km/L” setting, the indi-cated maximum value of instantaneousfuel consumption is 30. No more than 30will be indicated on the display even ifthe actual instantaneous fuel consump-tion is higher.

• For “MPG” setting, the indicated maxi-mum value of instantaneous fuel con-sumption is 80. No more than 80 will beindicated on the display even if theactual instantaneous fuel consumption ishigher.

• The indication on the display may bedelayed if fuel consumption is greatlyaffected by driving conditions.

• The display shows estimated values.Indications may not be the same asactual values.

Average fuel consumptionIf you selected average fuel consumptionthe last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-play shows the last value of average fuelconsumption from previous driving whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to “ON”. Unlessyou reset the value of average fuel con-sumption, the display indicates the value ofaverage fuel consumption which includesaverage fuel consumption during previousdriving.NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the value of averagefuel consumption will be shown after driv-ing for a period of time.You can select when the value of averagefuel consumption is reset from among thefollowing three methods;• Reset after refuel: the value of average

fuel consumption will be reset automati-cally by refueling.

• Reset with trip A: the value of averagefuel consumption will be reset automati-cally by resetting trip meter A.

• Reset manually: the value of averagefuel consumption will be reset by push-ing and holding the indicator selectorknob (2) when the display indicates theaverage fuel consumption.

To change when the value of average fuelconsumption is reset, refer to “SettingMode” later in this section. NOTE:If you add only a small amount of fuelwhen you select “Reset after refuel”, theaverage fuel consumption value may notbe reset.

Driving rangeIf you selected driving range the last timeyou drove the vehicle, the display indicates“---” for a few seconds and then indicatesthe current driving range when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to ON.The driving range shown in the display isthe approximate distance you can driveuntil the fuel gauge indicates “E”, based oncurrent driving conditions.When the low fuel warning light comes on,the display “---” will appear. If the low fuel warning light comes on, fillthe fuel tank immediately.As the driving range after refueling is cal-culated based on the most recent drivingcondition, the value is different each timeyou refuel.NOTE:• If you refuel when the ignition switch is in

the “ON” position or the ignition mode is“ON”, the driving range may not indicatethe correct value.

• When you reconnect the negative (–)terminal to the battery, the value of driv-ing range will be shown after driving for aperiod of time.

2-54

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Average SpeedIf you selected average speed the last timeyou drove the vehicle, the display indicatesthe last value of average speed fromprevious driving when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position or the engineswitch is pressed to change the ignitionmode to “ON”. Unless you reset the valueof average speed, the display indicates thevalue of average speed which includesaverage speed during previous driving.To reset the value of average speed, pushand hold the indicator selector knob (2) forabout 2 seconds when the display indicatesan average speed. The display shows “---”and then indicates a new average speedafter driving for a short time.NOTE:When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-minal to the battery, the value of averagespeed will be shown after driving for aperiod of time.

Trip MeterThe display (D) shows the trip meter.The trip meter can be used to measure thedistance traveled on short trips or betweenfuel stops.You can use the trip meter A or trip meter Bindependently.To reset the trip meter to zero, push andhold the trip meter selector knob (3) forabout 2 seconds when the display showsthe trip meter.

OdometerThe display (E) shows the odometer.The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

Setting ModeWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is ON and thevehicle is stationary, you can enter the set-ting mode of the information display bypushing and holding the indicator selectorknob (2) for more than 3 seconds.• To select the setting that you want to

change, turn the indicator selector knob(2) left or right.

• To change the setting, push the indicatorselector knob (2).

• To exit the setting mode, select “Back”and push the indicator selector knob (2).

61MM0A161

NOTE:The currently selected setting item is indi-cated enclosed by a frame.NOTE:• If you push and hold the indicator selec-

tor knob (2) to enter the setting modewhen the display (D) shows average fuelconsumption or average speed, thevalue will be reset simultaneously. If youdo not want to reset the value, push theindicator selector knob quickly to switchthe indication of the display.

• If you turn the ignition switch, press theengine switch or start to move the vehi-cle when the display is in the settingmode, the setting mode will be canceledautomatically.

NOTICEKeep track of your odometer readingand check the maintenance sched-ule regularly for required services.Increased wear or damage to certainparts can result from failure to per-form required services at the propermileage intervals.

EXAMPLE

2-55

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Distance unit (Odo/trip meter distance units setting)You can change the units odo/trip meterdistance is displayed in.NOTE:When you change the units odo/trip meterdistance is displayed in, the trip meter willbe reset automatically.Fuel economy (Fuel consumption units setting)You can change the units that fuel con-sumption is displayed in.LanguageYou can change the language of the infor-mation display.Fuel reset (Average fuel consumptionreset setting)You can change when the value of aver-age fuel consumption is reset.Temperature (Temperature units setting)You can change the units that temperatureis displayed in.NOTE:When you change the units that tempera-ture is displayed in, the automatic heatingand air conditioning system (if equipped)temperature display units will be changedautomatically.

Set Sensors (Parking sensors (if equipped) setting)The parking sensor can be switchedbetween the normal mode and trailermode.Clock setting• To change the hour indication, turn the

indicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the hour indicationappears as reversed color. To changethe hour indication quickly, turn and holdthe indicator selector knob (2). To set thehour indication, push the indicator selec-tor knob (2) and the minute indicationappears as reversed color.

• To change the minute indication, turn theindicator selector knob (2) left or rightrepeatedly when the minute indicationappears as reversed color. To changethe minute indication quickly, turn andhold the indicator selector knob (2). Toset the minute indication, push the indi-cator selector knob (2).

You can also switch the time indicationbetween 12-hour and 24-hour format.

Door Lock (Door lock setting)• Door Unlock• All Doors:

Unlock all doors by turning the key, oroperating the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch once

• Driver Door:Unlock all doors by turning the key, oroperating the keyless entry systemtransmitter, keyless push start systemremote controller or request switch twice(default setting)

• Auto Lock• Manual Lock:

Disable the automatic door locking func-tion

• Speed Syncro:Lock all doors when the vehicle speedreaches 15 km/h (default setting)

• Auto Unlock• Syncro Off:

Disable the automatic door unlockingfunction (default setting for the vehiclewith the keyless push start system)

• IG-OFF Sync:Unlock all doors when the key is pulledout from the ignition switch or the engineswitch is pressed to change the ignitionmode to LOCK (OFF) (default setting forthe vehicle without the keyless pushstart system)

2-56

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

• AlarmYou can turn off or on the siren soundwhen the door(s) is (are) locked orunlocked.

Lights (Light setting)• Foot Lights (Foot well lights setting)

(if equipped)The foot well lights can be programmed forinterlocked operation with either lightingcontrol or door operation and for no light-ing. (default setting is door operation)• Lane Change

(Turn signal lights setting)The turn signal and its indicator can be setwhether they flash three times even if youreturn the turn signal control lever immedi-ately after moving it. (default setting isenabled state)Anti theft (Security system (if equipped) setting)• Mode SelectYou can switch the security system fromthe enabled state to the disabled state, andvice versa.The state of the security system is shownon the information display as follows:• Mode A: Disabled state• Mode D: Enabled state (default setting)• Shock SensorYou can switch the shock sensor from thedisabled state to the enabled state, andvice versa. (default setting is disabledstate)

• Shock Sens PYou can adjust the pre-warning sensitivity ofshock sensor. (default setting level is 14)• Shock Sens FYou can adjust the full blast warning sensi-tivity of shock sensor. (default setting levelis 9)

Default (initialization setting)If you select “Yes” and push the indicatorselector knob (2), all settings will be reini-tialized.

Warning and Indicator MessagesThe display shows warning and indicatormessages to let you know about certainvehicle problems.A tone may also sound to alert you.

If warning and indicator messages appearon the display, follow the messages.Master warning indicator light

78K049

When the display shows warning and indicatormessages, the master warning indicator lightmay also blink.

NOTE:• When the problem that causes a message to

appear is corrected, the message will disap-pear.

• If a message is displayed, and other prob-lems requiring a message occur, the mes-sage for each of the problems will bealternately displayed about every 5 seconds.

• When you push and hold the indicator selec-tor knob (2) for about 2 seconds while a mes-sage is displayed, the message willdisappear temporarily. If the problem thatcaused the message is not corrected, themessage will appear again after 5 seconds.

2-57

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Warning and indicator messages

Warning and Indicator Message

Master WarningIndicator Light Sound Cause and Remedy

61MM0A162

Blinks (only while vehicle is in motion)

Beep (one time from interior buzzer; only while vehicle is in motion)A door or tailgate is not properly closed. Stop in a safe place and close the door or tailgate properly.(#1)

64MS182

2-58

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

(#1) This message will disappear for a while even if the problem that caused the message to appear is not corrected.



Keyless Push Start System

61MM0A163

Off Off This message is displayed when the ACCposition is selected as the power supplyposition. (#1)


61MM0A164

Off Off The clutch pedal is depressed. Press theengine switch to start the engine.

2-59

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E




61MM0A166

Off Off The engine switch is pressed withoutdepressing the brake and clutch pedals. Tryagain as instructed by the message.


61MM0A168

Blinks Beep (one time from interiorbuzzer)

There is a problem with the steering locksystem.Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.


61MM0A168


There is a problem with the steering locksystem.Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

WARNINGEngine can be started only afterdepressing the clutch pedal. How-ever, before depressing the clutchpedal make sure that the transaxle isin Neutral and brake pedal isdepressed.

2-60

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E




61MM0A170

Blinks Series of beeps under cer-tain conditions (for about 2seconds from exterior and/orinterior buzzers)

The remote controller may be outside thevehicle or its battery may have become dis-charged. Locate the remote controller ortouch the engine switch with the remotecontroller.If the message still appears, replace theremote controller battery.

61MM0A171

2-61

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E




61MM0A172

Blinks Continuous beep (from inte-rior buzzer)

The headlights and/or the position lights areleft on. Turn them off.


61MM0A173

Off Off This message is displayed when the ONposition is selected as the power supplyposition. (#1)

2-62

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E




61MM0A176

Off Off The road may be icy. Drive very carefully.(#1)


61MM0A177

Off Off The remote controller battery is about tobecome flat. Replace the battery. (#1)

61MM0A225


There may be a problem with the fuel filter.Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

2-63

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with a parking sensor system, the information display also indicates warning and indicator messages relatedto the system. For information on these messages, refer to “Parking Sensors” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.



61MM0A226


There is a possibility to have water in thefuel filter.Have your vehicle inspected by an autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop.

61MM0A180


If this message is displayed, have yourvehicle inspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

2-64

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Warning and Indicator LightsNOTE:If warning and indicator lights blink orcome on, the corresponding messagesmay be shown on the information display.

Brake System Warning Light

65D477

Three different types of operations existdepending on the vehicle’s specification.1) The light comes on briefly when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch is pressedto change the ignition mode to “ON”.

2) The light comes on when the parkingbrake is engaged with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position or the igni-tion mode “ON”.

3) The light comes on when under eitheror both of above two conditions.

The light also comes on when the fluid inthe brake fluid reservoir falls below thespecified level.The light should go out after starting theengine and fully releasing the parkingbrake, if the fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir is adequate.

If your vehicle is equipped with the ABS,the brake system warning light also comeson together with the ABS warning lightwhen the rear brake force control function(proportioning valve function) of the ABSsystem fails.If the brake system warning light comes onwhile you are driving the vehicle, it maymean that there is something wrong withthe vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,you should:1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.

2) Test the brakes by carefully starting andstopping on the shoulder of the road.

3) If you determine that it is safe, drivecautiously at low speed to the nearestdealer for repairs or have the vehicletowed to the nearest dealer for repairs.

NOTE:Because the brake system is self-adjust-ing, the fluid level will drop as the brakepads become worn. Replenishing thebrake fluid reservoir is considered normalperiodic maintenance.NOTE:(Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer)A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if youstart the vehicle without releasing the park-ing brake. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and the brake sys-tem warning light turns off.

WARNINGRemember that stopping distancemay be longer, you may have to pushharder on the pedal, and the pedalmay go down farther than normal.

WARNINGIf any of the following conditionsoccur, you should immediately askyour authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop to inspect the brake system.• If the brake system warning light

does not go out after the enginehas been started and the parkingbrake has been fully released.

• If the brake system warning lightdoes not come on when the igni-tion switch is turned to the “ON”position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignitionmode to “ON”.

• If the brake system warning lightcomes on at any time during vehi-cle operation.

2-65

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light (if equipped)

65D529

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON”, the light comes on briefly so you cancheck that the light is working.If the light stays on, or comes on whendriving, there may be something wrongwith the ABS.If this happens: 1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or

change the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switchand then start the engine again.

If the warning light comes on briefly thenturns off, the system is normal. If the warn-ing light still stays on.If the light and the brake system warninglight stay on, or come on simultaneouslywhen driving, your ABS system isequipped with the rear brake force controlfunction (proportioning valve function) and

there may be something wrong with boththe rear brake force control function andanti-lock function of the ABS system.If one of these happens, have the systeminspected by your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.If the ABS becomes inoperative, the brakesystem will function as an ordinary brakesystem that does not have this ABS sys-tem.For details of ABS system, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPER-ATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Oil Pressure Light

50G051A

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, and goes out whenthe engine is started. The light will comeon and remain on if there is insufficient oilpressure. If the light comes on when driv-ing, pull off the road as soon as you canand stop the engine. Check the oil level and add oil if necessary.If there is enough oil, the lubrication sys-tem should be inspected by your autho-rised Maruti Suzuki workshop before youdrive the vehicle again.

NOTICE• If you operate the engine with this

light on, severe engine damage canresult.

• Do not rely on the oil pressure lightto indicate the need to add oil. Besure to periodically check theengine oil level.

2-66

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Charging Light

50G052

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to “ON”, and goes out whenthe engine is started. The light will comeon and remain on if there is somethingwrong with the battery charging system. Ifthe light comes on when the engine is run-ning, the charging system should beinspected immediately by your authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop.

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

60G049

When the driver doesn’t buckle his or herseat belt, this light will come on and/orblink.For details about the seat belt reminder,refer to “Seat Belts and Child RestraintSystems” in this section.

Air Bag Light

63J030

This light blinks or comes on for severalseconds when the ignition switch is turnedto the “ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON” so you can check if the light is work-ing.

The light will come on and stay on if thereis a problem in the air bag system or theseat belt pretensioner system (ifequipped).

WARNINGIf the AIR BAG light does not blink orcome on briefly when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” positionor the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to ON,stays on for more than 10 seconds,or comes on while driving, the air bagsystem or the seat belt pretensionersystem (if equipped) may not workproperly. Have both systemsinspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.

2-67

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Malfunction Indicator Light

65D530

Your vehicle has a computer-controlledemission control system. A malfunctionindicator light is provided on the instrumentpanel to indicate when it is necessary tohave the emission control system serviced.The malfunction indicator light comes onwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to“ON” to let you know the light is workingand goes out when the engine is started. If the malfunction indicator light comes onor blinks when the engine is running, thereis a damage in the emission control sys-tem.Bring the vehicle to your authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop to have the damagefixed.

Immobilizer/Keyless Push Start System Warning Light

80JM122

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode toON, the light comes on briefly so you cancheck that the light is working. If this lightstays on, there is a problem with the sys-tem. Ask your authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop to have the system inspected.

Open Door Warning Light

54G391

This light remains on until all doors (includ-ing the tailgate) are completely closed.If any door (including the tailgate) is openwhen the vehicle is moving, a ding soundsto remind you to close all doors completely.

Low Fuel Warning Light

54G343

If this light comes on, fill the fuel tankimmediately.When this light comes on, a ding soundsonce to remind you to fill the fuel.If you do not fill the fuel, a ding soundsevery time when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position or the engineswitch is pressed to change the ignitionmode to ON.NOTE:The activation point of this light variesdepending on road conditions (for exam-ple, slope or curve) and driving conditionsbecause of fuel moving in the tank.

NOTICEContinuing to drive the vehicle whenthe malfunction indicator light is onor blinking can cause permanentdamage to the vehicle’s emissioncontrol system, and can affect fueleconomy and driveability.

2-68

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Electric Power Steering Light

79J039

This light comes on when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position or theengine switch is pressed to change theignition mode to ON, and goes out whenthe engine is started.If this light comes on or blinks while driv-ing, the power steering system may notwork properly. Have the system inspectedby your authorised Maruti Suzuki work-shop.NOTE:While parking or driving at very low speedgreater steering effort is required. This isnot a malfunction of the steering systembut power steering control system limitingpower assist in order to prevent it fromover heating. • The steering wheel is operated very

often.• The steering wheel is kept in a fully

turned position for a long while. When the power steering control systemcools down, the power steering system isrestored back to the original condition.

However, repeating these operations couldcause damage to the power steering sys-tem.NOTE:If the power steering system does not workproperly, you will feel heavier to steer butyou still will be able to steer.NOTE:If the steering is operated, you may hear anoise. This is normal and indicates that thepower steering system works properly.

“CRUISE” Indicator Light (if equipped)

52D113

When the cruise control system is on, thislight will be on.

“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)

65D474

When a cruising speed of the cruise con-trol is set, this light will be on.

Turn Signal Indicators

50G055

When you turn on the left or right turn sig-nals, the corresponding green arrow on theinstrument panel will flash along with therespective turn signal lights. When youturn on the hazard warning switch, botharrows will flash along with all of the turnsignal lights.

2-69

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Main Beam (high beam) Indicator Light

50G056

This indicator comes on when headlightmain beams (high beams) are turned on.

Illumination Indicator Light

64J045

This indicator light comes on while theposition lights, tail light and/or the head-lights are on.

Glow Plug Indicator Light

60A543

If the coolant temperature is cool enough,this light comes on when the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position or the engineswitch is pressed to change the ignitionmode to ON and goes out when the glowplug is heated enough for engine starting.Fuel Filter Warning Light

60A541

This light comes on for several secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode to ONso you can check that light is working.If the light comes on when driving, there isa possibility to have water in the fuel filter.Drain water as soon as possible.Have yourvehicle inspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop. For details of drainingwater, refer to “Fuel Filter” in the “INSPEC-TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

Master Warning Indicator Light

78K049

When the information display shows warn-ing and indicator messages, this indicatorlight may also blink.For details, refer to “Information Display” inthis section.

2-70

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Lighting Control Lever

65D611

Lighting Operation

60MK011

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are threepositions:OFF (1)All lights are off.

(2)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlightsare on.

60MK012

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.

Automatic Lights Operation (if equipped)

64MS059

WARNINGTo avoid possible injury, do not oper-ate controls by reaching through thesteering wheel.

(1)(2)

(3)EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

(3) (4)

(2)(1)

EXAMPLE

2-71

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

64MS060

Your vehicle’s lighting system is controlledby two main systems: the Lighting switchand the Auto-On Headlight System (whenthe lighting switch is in the “AUTO” posi-tion).The two systems work together to operateyour lights as shown in the following chart:

(5)ON: Lights ONLIGHT: When it is light around the light sensor (5).DARK: When it is dark around the light sensor (5).

Lighting switch posi-tion

Main lights to be operated

Ignition mode LOCK (OFF) or ACC Ignition mode ON

LIGHT DARK LIGHT DARK

(1) OFFPosition lights, Tail lights – – – –

Headlights – – – –

(2) AUTOPosition lights, Tail lights – – – ON

Headlights – – – ON

(3)Position lights, Tail lights ON ON ON ON

Headlights – – – –

(4)Position lights, Tail lights ON ON ON ON

Headlights ON ON ON ON

2-72

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knobon the end of the lever. There are fourpositions:OFF (1)All lights are off.AUTO (2)This function works when it on mode hasbeen changed to ON by pressing theengine switch. The headlights and positionlights are turned on and off automaticallyaccording to the amount of outside lightdetected by a sensor. They go out auto-matically when you change the ignitionmode to “ACC” or “LOCK” (OFF) by press-ing the engine switch.The light sensor (5) for sensing the amountof outside light is installed on the upperpart of the windshield. It also serves as therain sensor for the rain-sensing wipers.

NOTE:• Avoid covering the light sensor area of

the windshield with a sticker. The stickermay impair the performance of the sen-sor and make the system unable to con-trol operation of the lights correctly.

• If you changed the ignition mode to ONby pressing the engine switch and the“AUTO” position remains selected, theheadlights and position lights come onautomatically as the outside gets darkeven with the engine not running. Leav-ing the lights lit for a long time may leadto a completely discharged battery.

(3)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light and instrument lights are on, butheadlights are off.

(4)Front position lights, tail lights, licenseplate light, instrument lights and headlightsare on.

64MS061

With the headlights on, push the lever for-ward to switch to the high beams (mainbeams) or pull the lever toward you toswitch to the low beams. When the highbeams (main beams) are on, a light on theinstrument panel will come on. To momen-tarily activate the high beams (mainbeams) as a passing signal, pull the leverslightly toward you and release it when youhave completed the signal.Auto-on headlight system

64MS062

The Auto-on headlight system automati-cally turns on all lights that are operated bythe lighting control lever on the steeringcolumn, when the following three condi-tions are all met.Conditions for Auto-on headlight systemoperation:1) It is dark around the light sensor (5).2) The lighting control lever is in the

“AUTO” position.3) You press the engine switch to change

the ignition mode to ON.

CAUTIONIf the light sensor area of the wind-shield is covered with mud, ice, orother similar substances, the head-lights and position lights may beturned on even when it is still lightoutside. Before removing such sub-stances from the windshield, alwaysset the wiper control lever to the“OFF” position. If the lever is left inthe “AUTO” position, the wiperscould unexpectedly operate andcause injury, and could also be dam-aged.

EXAMPLE

2-73

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

This system is operated by a signal fromthe light sensor (5) on the front windshield.Do not cover the sensor (5). If you do, thesystem will not work correctly.

NOTE:The light sensor is sensitive to infraredrays, so it may operate incorrectly in theregion of strong infrared rays.Reprogramming the automatic lightfunctionThe following settings of the automaticlight function can be customized to yourpreference. Please contact an authorisedMaruti Suzuki workshop if you want thefunction reprogrammed.Sensitivity of the light sensorThe amount of outside light needed to turnthe lights on and off is pre-set at the fac-tory. The sensitivity of the light sensor canbe adjusted so that the lights are turned onand off when it is:• lighter outside than the pre-set condition,

or• darker outside than the pre-set condition

Rain-triggered automatic lighting oper-ationThe setting of the auto-on headlight sys-tem can be changed to make it turn on theheadlights:• when the rain sensor senses heavy rain-

fall• when the rain sensor senses light and

heavy rainfall (in coordination with rain-sensing wiper operation), or

• independently from rain-sensing wiperoperation.

Light Reminder BuzzerThe interior buzzer continuously beeps ifyou open the driver’s door without turningoff the headlights and position lights. Thisfunction is triggered under the followingcondition:The headlights and/or position lights areon even after the ignition switch is turnedoff, or the engine switch is pressed tochange the ignition mode to LOCK (OFF).The buzzer stops sounding when you turnoff the headlights and position lights.

NOTE:A message is indicated on the informationdisplay in the instrument cluster while thebuzzer is sounding.

Front Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

64J058

The front fog light comes on when the foglight switch is pushed in with the positionlights, tail lights and/or the headlights areon. An indicator light above the switch willbe lit when the front fog light is on.NOTE:In some countries the lighting operationmay be different from the above descrip-tion according to local regulations.

WARNINGIt takes about 5 seconds for the lightsensor to react to a change in light-ing conditions. To help avoid an acci-dent due to reduced visibility, turn onyour headlights before driving into atunnel, parking structure or the like.

2-74

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Headlight Leveling Switch

80JM040

Level the headlight beam according to theload condition of your vehicle by turningthis switch. The chart below shows theappropriate switch position for differentvehicle-load conditions.

Turn Signal Control Lever

65D611

Turn Signal OperationWith the ignition switch in the “ON” positionor the ignition mode ON, move the lever upor down to activate the right or left turn sig-nals.Normal turn signal

60MK013

Move the lever all the way upward ordownward to signal. When the turn is com-pleted, the signal will cancel and the leverwill return to its normal position.Lane change signal

60MK014

Move the lever part-way in the direction toturn and hold it there.

Vehicle Load Condition

Switch Position

D13A Engine

D16AAEngine

Driver only 0 0

Driver + 1 passenger (in front seat)

0 0

Driver + 4 passengers, no cargo

1 1

Driver + 4 passengers, cargo added

2 2

Driver + full cargo 3 3


EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

2-75

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

• The turn signal and its indicator flashwhile the lever is held at the moved posi-tion.

The turn signal and its indicator flash threetimes even if you return the lever immedi-ately after moving it.NOTE:The turn signal and its indicator can be setwhether they flash three times after theturn signal lever is returned via the infor-mation display. Refer to “Information Dis-play” in this section.NOTE:You can customize the setting for the num-ber of times of flashing of the turn signaland its indicator (1 to 4 times). Please askan authorised Maruti Suzuki workshop forthe customization.

Hazard Warning Switch

61M0163

Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-vate the hazard warning lights. All turn sig-nal lights and both turn signal indicatorswill flash simultaneously. To turn off thelights, push the switch again.Use the hazard warning lights to warnother traffic during emergency parking orwhen your vehicle could otherwise becomea traffic hazard.

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever

57L21128

EXAMPLE


2-76

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Wiper and Washer OperationWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position or the ignition mode is ON, youcan use the wiper/washer lever or switch (ifequipped).

Windshield Wipers

64MS063

To turn the windshield wipers on, move thelever down to one of the three operatingpositions. In the “INT” position, the wipersoperate intermittently. The “INT” position isvery convenient for driving in mist or lightrain. In the “LO” position, the wipers oper-ate at a steady low speed. In the “HI” posi-tion, the wipers operate at a steady highspeed. To turn off the wipers, move thelever back to the “OFF” position.

Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position, the windshield wipers will turn oncontinuously at low speed.

64MS064

If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”control, turn the control forward or rear-ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera-tion to the desired interval.

Windshield Wipers with Rain Sens-ing Function (if equipped)

64MS065

Press the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to ON. To turn the rain-sensingwipers on, move the lever down to one ofthe three operating positions. In the“AUTO” position (if provided), the wipersautomatically operate when the wiper sys-tem senses rain or snow. In the “LO” posi-tion, the wipers operate at a steady lowspeed. In the “HI” position, the wipersoperate at a steady high speed. To turn offthe wipers, move the lever back to the“OFF” position.

Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”position; the wipers will operate continu-ously at low speed for as long as you holdthe lever in the “MIST” position.

EXAMPLE

EXAMPLE

MIST

HI

OFF

LO

AUTO

EXAMPLE

2-77

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

64MS066

If the control lever has on “AUTO” position,you can change the system’s sensitivity torain/snow by turning the knob of the con-trol lever forward for increased sensitivityor rearward for decreased sensitivity.

61M0219

(1) Rain sensor

NOTE:• Under the following conditions, the rain

sensor may not be able to sense rain orsnow correctly, and thus the rain-sensingwiper function may not work or may workincorrectly. (Use a position other than“AUTO” under these conditions.)– Rain or snow does not hit the rain sen-

sor area of the windshield, or the snowis not of a type that is able to bedetected by the sensor.

– The rain sensor area is covered withmud, ice or other similar substance.You should remove any foreign sub-stance.

– There were already raindrops on thewindshield before starting rain-sensingwiper operation. You should removethe raindrops by operating the wipersunder manual control.

– The rain sensor is hotter than 80°C(176°F) in the sun or lower than –10°C(14°F) in freezing weather. (The wip-ers do not operate under this condi-tion.)

– The windshield is coated with a water-repellent substance, which causesraindrops to run down quickly. This willgive a clearer view and the wipersmay seem to operate too frequently. Inthis case, decrease the system’s sen-sitivity.

– The sensor area is covered with asticker.

– The wiper blades are damaged. Youshould replace them.

• The following conditions may indicateproblems with the rain-sensing wipersystem. If your system exhibits any ofthe following conditions, have itinspected by an authorised MarutiSuzuki workshop.– Rainfall/snowfall rate varies but the

wiping interval remains constant.– Rain/snow is falling but the wipers do

not operate.

EXAMPLE

(1)

CAUTION• Observe the following instructions

when the wiper lever is set to the“AUTO” position with the engineswitch in the ON mode. Otherwise,the wipers could unexpectedlyoperate and cause injury, and couldalso be damaged.– Do not touch or wipe the rain

sensor area of the windshieldwith a cloth.

– Do not hit the windshield or rainsensor.

• Be sure to set the wiper controllever to the “OFF” position beforewashing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash or cleaning thewindshield.

2-78

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Reprogramming the rain-sensing wiperfunctionThe “AUTO” position operation of the rain-sensing wiper function can be customizedto your preference by reprogramming itssetting as follows. Please contact anauthorised Maruti Suzuki workshop for thiscustomization.Full-automatic wiping (factory setting)The system automatically selects the mostappropriate of the following wiping modes:no wiping, intermittent wiping, low-speedwiping, and high-speed wiping.Semi-automatic wipingThe system automatically selects the mostappropriate of the following wiping modes:intermittent wiping, low-speed wiping, orhigh-speed wiping. (The wipers do not stopautomatically.)Intermittent wipingThe wipers operate only in the intermittentwiping mode. The wiping interval can bechanged with the knob on the control lever.

Windshield Washer

64MS067

To spray windshield washer fluid, pull thelever toward you. The windshield wiperswill automatically turn on at low speed ifthey are not already on and the “INT” posi-tion is equipped.

WARNING• To prevent windshield icing in cold

weather, turn on the defroster toheat the windshield before andduring windshield washer use.

• Do not use radiator antifreeze inthe windshield washer reservoir. Itcan severely impair visibility whensprayed on the windshield, and canalso damage your vehicle’s paint.

EXAMPLENOTICE

To help prevent damage to the wind-shield wiper and washer systemcomponents, you should take the fol-lowing precautions:• Do not continue to hold in the lever

when there is no windshieldwasher fluid being sprayed or thewasher motor can be damaged.

• Do not attempt to remove dirt froma dry windshield with the wipers oryou can damage the windshieldand the wiper blades. Always wetthe windshield with washer fluidbefore operating the wipers.

• Clear ice or packed snow from thewiper blades before using the wip-ers.

• Check the washer fluid level regu-larly. Check it often when theweather is bad.

• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir3/4 full during cold weather to allowroom for expansion if the tempera-ture falls low enough to freeze thesolution.

2-79

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (if equipped)

64MS068

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rearwiper switch on the end of the lever for-ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle isequipped the “INT” position, the rear wiperoperates intermittently when you twist theswitch forward to the “INT” position. To turnthe rear wiper off, twist the switch rearwardto the “OFF” position.

With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,twist the switch rearward and hold it thereto spray window washer fluid.

With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,turn the switch forward and hold it there tospray window washer fluid.

Tilt/Telescoping (if equipped) Steer-ing Lock Lever

61MM0A085

(1) LOCK(2) UNLOCK

The lock lever is located under the steeringcolumn. To adjust the steering wheelheight and fore-aft position:1) Push down the lock lever to unlock the

steering column.2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

height and fore-aft position and lock thesteering column by pulling up the locklever.

3) Try moving the steering wheel up anddown and back and forth to make sureit is securely locked in position.

EXAMPLE

Intermittent wiper

Washer Wiper

NOTICEClear ice or snow from the rear win-dow and rear wiper blade beforeusing the rear wiper. Accumulatedice or snow could prevent the wiperblade from moving, causing damageto the wiper motor.

WARNINGNever attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while the vehicle is moving oryou could lose control of the vehicle.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

2-80

BEFORE DRIVING

64MS0-74E

Horn

68LM240

Press the horn button of the steering wheelto sound the horn. The horn will sound withthe ignition switch in any position or anyignition mode.

Heated Rear Window Switch (if equipped)Type 1

64MS167

Type 2

64MS168

When the rear window is misted, push thisswitch (1) to clear the mist from the win-dow.An indicator light will be lit when the defog-ger is on. The defogger will work onlywhen the engine is running. To turn off thedefogger, push the switch (1) again.

NOTE:• The defogger will work only when the

engine is running.• The defogger will automatically turn off

after the defogger remains on for 15 min-utes to prevent discharging of the bat-tery.

EXAMPLE

REAR

(1)

EXAMPLE

A/C

01

2 34

(1)

EXAMPLE

NOTICEThe heated rear window uses a largeamount of electricity. Be sure to turnoff after the window and mirrors havebecome clear.

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��B��! ��1� ��)� ((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��+�� %#&��2�#&-�� (((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��)��#��2�� !�%�� (((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�/�)��,��&��C8#��&�#�,��!��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D� (((((((((((((((((( 9�9��)��#��,��&�C8#��&�#�,��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D�(((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�:�#+�# �0! ��+ �#��C��#6!�%%#$D� ((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�;0��-��)�.��-#��#'#�� ((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�>0#$��((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��)��#��)��#�C8#��&�#�,��!��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D� (((((((((((((((((( 9��)��#��)��#�C8#��&�#�,��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D�(((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��/ ��)��#�� B�#� (((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��72�!� #�2��C��#6!�%%#$D�((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��;0��-��)��#� �� C��#6!�%%#$D� ((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9��=�#��'�#,�2��#��C��#6!�%%#$D�(((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�/7.��-��)�((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((((( 9�/<

9

9��

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

�B��! ��1� ��)

52D334

��+�� %#&��2�#&-�� .#��#��'��)

60A187

1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lightsand reflectors are clean and unob-structed.

2) Visually check the tires for the followingpoints:

– the depth of the tread groove– abnormal wear, cracks and damage– loose wheel nuts– existence of foreign material such as

nails, stones, etc.Refer to “Tires” in E��0�2�� 2�F section for details.3) Look for fluid and oil leaks.NOTE:It is normal for water to drip from the airconditioning system after use.

��1�'��$� "�#��)� #B��! �� )� # �B��! ��)� # �&��&��"��B��$#*��%��#��+��#��)� �� &��# � ��$� �$��# (� ��&#� &��"��B�$#� � � $��&!�� $#�#&�� "+�� #��*� "#� !�#� �� -#� ��#� ��,��)%�#&�!�� #�%� %�#'#�� &��"��B�$#��#��#��)�+�!��'#��&�#(G �� #�'#� ��#� #�)��#� �!��)� ��)��)# ��#��&��#$��#� (

G ��%��-�,��#�#�)��#��!��)��)�%#��$��#*�#'#��%#��#�(�� #&# ��+�� #��%��-#$�'#��&�#�,��#� #�)��#� �!��)*� ��-#� !�#� ��#��-#� #�#&�� #��#��# ��%� ��$��#�"��,#�� )� %##$(�

(Continued)

��1(Continued)G �'��$� �%#��)� ��#� '#��&�#� ,��#� ��)��#� �� !�-� �%#�(� �� #&# ��+��%#��#��#�'#��&�#

G ,�� #� ��)��#� �� !�-� �%#�*��-#� !�#��#� !��C��#6!�%%#$D��$��,��$�, ��#�&�� #$*��$��#"��,#�� )�� %##$�,��#��-#� #�#&�� #�� #� ��# �� %� ��(

G �� ,� %��%#�� %#�� +�!�'#��&�#H � '#�� + �#�*� -##%��#� �� #�� )��#� �� #,��$ ��#�$�&�#�� ,*��#�'# ��#��" ��!&�� # (

G �##%��#�#B��! ��%�%#��#��&�#�� ,��$��#��#��#�%�#$!&#� ��#� "!��$!%� �� #B��! �)� # � !�$#�� #� '#��&�#(� �� %��&!��+��%��,�#��%��-#$��"��44��$�&��$�� (

G @�'#��#�#B��! �� + �#�� %#&�#$%#��$�&��+� ��$��)#��$� �#�- (��+� $��)#� �� #�- � ��!�$� "#�#%��#$��#$��#�+(

9�/

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed andlatched.

5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,brake lights and horn for proper opera-tion.

6) Adjust the seat and head restraint.7) Check the brake pedal and the parking

brake lever.8) Adjust the mirrors.9) Make sure that you and all passengers

have properly fastened the seat belts.10)Make sure that all warning lights come

on as the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position or the engine switch ispressed to change the ignition mode toON.

11)Check all gauges.12)Make sure that the BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING light turns off when the park-ing brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fueltank, perform the following under-hoodchecks:1) Engine oil level2) Coolant level3) Brake fluid level4) Battery electrolyte level5) Windshield washer fluid level6) Hood latch operation

Pull the hood release handle inside thevehicle. Make sure that you cannotopen the hood all the way withoutreleasing the secondary latch. Be sureto close the hood securely after check-ing for proper latch operation. See the

item “All latches, hinges and locks” ofE2@�� .�?F in the “Peri-odic Maintenance Schedule” in theE��0�2��2�Fsection for lubrication schedule.

Once a month, or each time you fill yourfuel tank, check the tire pressure using atire pressure gauge. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire.

��)��#��2�� !�%��It is normal for the engine to consumesome engine oil during normal vehicleoperation.The amount of engine oil consumeddepends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions underwhich the vehicle is driven.More oil is consumed during high-speeddriving and when there is frequent acceler-ation and deceleration. Under high loads,your engine also will consume more oil.A new engine also consumes more oil,since its pistons, piston rings and cylinderwalls have not yet become conditioned.New engines reach the normal level of oilconsumption only after approximately5000 km (3000 miles) driving.��&�� !�%��I��B(��(��%#��-��C��A�(�%#��;��# DWhen judging the amount of oil consump-tion, note that the oil may become dilutedand make it difficult to accurately judge thetrue oil level.As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more of driv-ing. This is because the oil is graduallybecoming diluted with fuel or moisture,

��1��-#� !�#� ��#� ��$� � � �!��+� &�� #$��$��&�#$�"#��#�$��'��)(�� *�� &�� +� !%� !�#B%#&�#$�+� $!��)$��'��)*� �" ��!&��)� +�!�� '�#,� ��$�# !��)��&&�$#��(

9�9

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

making it appear that the oil level has notchanged.You should also be aware that the dilutingingredients evaporate out when the vehicleis subsequently driven at high speeds,such as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter high-speed driving.

�)��,��&��C8#��&�#�,��!��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D

65D611

52KM052

The ignition switch has the following fourpositions:��2�This is the normal parking position. It is theonly position in which the key can beremoved.

60G033

��1��'��$�%� �"�#��5!�+*�$��%#��#�&�� "+��#�&��)��!)��# �##��)�,�##�(

�J��0��

Turn to “LOCK

Push

��J��0��

9�7

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

You must push in the key to turn it to the“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, andprevents normal use of the steering wheelafter the key is removed.To release the steering lock, insert the keyand turn it clockwise to one of the otherpositions. If you have trouble turning thekey to unlock the steering, try turning thesteering wheel slightly to the right or leftwhile turning the key.�22Accessories such as the radio can oper-ate, but the engine is off.��This is the normal operating position. Allelectrical systems are on.��This is the position for starting the engineusing the starter motor. The key should bereleased from this position as soon as theengine starts.

�)��-#+��#��$#��C��#6!�%%#$DA buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to remove the ignition key if it is in theignition switch when the driver’s door isopened.

81A297S

��1G �#'#�� #�!�� #� �)�� ,��&�� #�E��2�F�%� ��$��#��'#��#�)�� -#+� ,��#� ��#� '#��&�#� � ��'��)(��#� �##��)�,�##��,��&-��$�+�!�,��"#��"�#�� ##��#'#��&�#(

G ��,�+ ��#�!��#��)�� ,��&��#�E��2�F�%� ��$��#��'#��#�)�� -#+�,�#�� #�'��)� ��#� '#��&�#�#'#��+�� #(�� $�� #�'#� &��$�#�� #� �� %��-#$�'#��&�#(� ��#�$#$�&��$�#�&�!�$�&�! #��&&�$#��'#�#��#� '#��&�#� �� &�!�$� ��%#�� ,��%�,#��,��$�, ��%�,#�� !��C��#6!�%%#$D(� ��#+� �� &�!�$� !��#�� #�� -#� �� ,�� ,#��#�(� ��# #� &�!�$� �# !�� #'#�#��5!�+��#'#��$#��(

NOTICEG �� ! #� ��#� ��#�� #��9�� #&��$ ��#(��#��#�)��#��$�# �� *��,��:� #&��$ ��"#��#��+��)��)��(��#�#�)��#��$�# �� #�� #'#��#�%� *�&�#&-��#��!#��$��)�� + �#� ��&�� !��+�!�� (

G �� #�'#� ��#� �)�� ,��&�� #� E��F� %� �� #� #�)��#� � �� !��)� � � ��#� "��#�+� ,�� $� �&��)#(

9�:

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

��)��#��,��&�C8#��&�#�,��#+�# �0! ��+ �#�D

61MM0B001

��2��C��DOnce this mode is selected by pressing theengine switch, opening or closing of anydoor (including the tailgate) will result inautomatic locking or steering.�22Press the engine switch to select this igni-tion mode to use such electric equipmentas the audio system, outside rearview mir-rors and accessory socket with the engineoff. When this position is selected, theinformation display in the instrument clus-ter shows the following message: “ACC”IGNITION SWITCH POSITION. Refer to“Information Display” in the E.��8��1F section for details.��G ��#�#�)��#��

You can use such electric equipment asthe power windows and wipers with theengine off. When this ignition mode isselected by pressing the engine switch,the information display in the instrumentcluster shows the following message:“ON” IGNITION SWITCH POSITION.

G ��#�#�)��#��All electric equipment is operational. Thevehicle can be driven when you haveselected this ignition mode by pressingthe engine switch.

��If you have the keyless push start systemcontroller with you, you can start theengine after shifting to “N” (neutral),

depressing the brake and clutch pedal andpressing the engine switch to select theignition mode.NOTE:You do not need to keep the engine switchpressed to start the engine.

EXAMPLE

NOTICE��#�'#��#�#�)��#� ,��&��#E�22F� �� E��F� ��$#� ,�#�� ##�)��#� � � �� !��)(� �'��$� ! ��)��#� ��$�� #�� #�#&��&� �&&# ��# � �� )��#�,�#��#�#�)��# ,��&�� #�E�22F��E��F��$#,�#��#�#�)��#�� !��)*��#�,� #��#�"��#�+��+�$� &��)#(

9�;

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

NOTE:In the presence of strong radio signals ornoise, you may not be able to change theignition mode to ACC or ON or to start theengine using the engine switch. In thiscase, the information display on the instru-ment cluster will show the following mes-sage: KEY FOB NOT DETECTED.

��#�#� #$��##��)��&-��)If the steering lock remains engaged whenyou press the engine switch to change theignition mode to “ON”, the information dis-play in the instrument cluster shows themessage: “TRN. STEERING WHEEL TORELEASE LOCK”. Refer to “InformationDisplay” in the E.��8��1F sec-tion for details.NOTE:The steering lock may not be released ifsome load is acting on the steering wheel.If this happens, turn the steering wheel tothe right or left to relieve it from the loadbefore you press the engine switch againto change to the desired ignition mode.

�#+�# �0! ��+ �#��C��#6!�%%#$DProvided the keyless push start systemremote controller is within the “interiorworkable area” (refer to the related expla-nation in this section), you can use theengine switch for starting the engine andselecting an ignition mode (ACC or ON). Inaddition, the following functions can beused:• Keyless entry function. Refer to “Keyless

Push Start System Remote Controller” inthe “BEFORE DRIVING” section fordetails.

• Locking and unlocking doors (includingthe tailgate) using a request switch.Refer to “Keyless Push Start SystemRemote Controller” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

• Immobilizer (anti-theft) function. Refer to“Immobilizer System” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

��)��#��,��&��!��The engine switch is illuminated (lit) in thefollowing situations:• When the engine is off and the driver’s

door is open or for 15 seconds after thedrivers door is closed.

• When the engine is off and the positionlights are on. The illumination will go outwhen the position lights are turned off.

• When the engine is on and the positionlights and/or the headlights are on. The

illumination will go out when the head-lights are turned off.

82K253

NOTE:To save the battery, the illumination will beautomatically turned off when both of thefollowing conditions are simultaneouslymet:• The headlights and position lights are

turned off.• A period of 15 minutes has elapsed after

opening the driver’s door.

�#�#&��)��$# Press the engine switch to select the“ACC” or “ON” mode as follows when youuse an electric accessory or check theoperation of instruments without runningthe engine.

1) Bring the keyless push start systemremote controller with you and sit in thedriver’s seat.

(1)

(2)

9�<

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

2) Without depressing the clutch pedal,press the engine switch (1).

82K254

Every time you press the engine switch,the ignition mode changes as follows.

57L31033

NOTE:When selecting the ignition modes, theinformation display in the instrument clus-ter shows certain messages. Refer to“Information Display” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

��#��1��$�&��)��"��- � ��$� ��#� �)�� $# � &��"#� #�#&�#$Your keyless push start system remote con-troller may not be sensed as being within the“interior workable area” (refer to the relatedexplanation in this section). Try again aftermaking sure you have the remote controllerwith you. If the ignition modes still cannot beselected, the battery of the remote controllermay be discharged. To be able to select anignition mode, you must then use the follow-ing method:

58MST0302

1) Without depressing the brake pedaland the clutch pedal, push the engineswitch (1).

2) Within about 10 seconds during whichthe master warning indicator light in theinstrument cluster is blinking and the“PLACE KEY FOB ON STARTSWITCH” message appears on theinformation display, touch the engine

switch with the lock button end of theremote controller (2) for about 2 sec-onds.

NOTE:• If you still cannot select the ignition

modes, there may be some problem withthe keyless push start system. Contactan �� for an inspection of the system.

• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light will come on for about5 seconds while the master warning indi-cator light is blinking. In addition, theinformation display in the instrumentcluster will show a message during thistime. Refer to “Information Display” inthe “BEFORE DRIVING” section fordetails.

• You may customize the system to causethe interior buzzer to sound once for theremote controller out of sensing rangewarning. To incorporate this customiza-tion, please contact an ��

• If the battery of the remote controller isabout to become completely discharged,the corresponding message will appearon the information display when youpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to ON. Refer to “Informa-tion Display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”section for details. For details on replac-ing the battery, refer to the “KeylessPush Start System Remote Controller” inthe “BEFORE DRIVING” section.

(OFF)

ONACCLOCK(Audio equipment)

�J��0��

(1)

9�=

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

�#��#�2��#��!� �$#��)When either of the conditions describedbelow is met, the system issues the remotecontroller outside warning by sounding theinterior and exterior buzzers. At the sametime, the immobilizer/keyless push startsystem warning light comes on and themaster warning indicator light blinks.• Any door is opened and then closed

while the remote controller is not insidethe vehicle and the engine is running orthe ignition mode has been changed to“ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engineswitch.

• The remote controller is not inside thevehicle when you attempt to start theengine after changing the ignition modeto “ACC” or “ON” by pressing the engineswitch.

61MM0A182

(1) Immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light (blinks)

(2) Master warning indicator light (blinks)NOTE:• If the warning is given, locate the remote

controller as soon as possible.• Any attempt to start the engine will fail

while the warning is active. The mes-sage appearing on the information dis-play in the instrument cluster will alsoindicate this condition. Refer to “Informa-tion display” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”section for details.

• Normally, the immobilizer/keyless pushstart system warning light should go outand the master warning indicator lightshould stop blinking shortly after theremote controller is brought back insidethe vehicle. If they remain lit and blink-ing, change the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch andthen perform the engine starting opera-tion. Refer to “Starting the Engine” in thissection.

• Always keep the remote controller withyou as the driver.

��#��-�"�#��#��)��#��)*��)��$#��#�#&��$��#��#�2��#��!� �$#��)

61MM0B002

(1) Interior workable areaThe interior workable area for these func-tions is defined as all the interior spacesexcept for the space above the instrumentpanel.NOTE:• Even when the remote controller is in the

“interior workable area”, if it is in any ofthe following conditions, you may not beable to start the engine or select the igni-tion modes, and the remote controlleroutside warning may be given.– The remote controller’s battery is low.– The remote controller is affected by

strong radio signals or noise.– The remote controller is in contact with

or covered by a metallic object.

(1)

(2)

(1)

9�>

�0��1�?� ��8�@�2��

– The remote controller is in stowagelike the glove box or a door pocket.

– The remote controller is in the sunvisor pocket or on the floor.

• Even when the remote controller is out-side the “interior workable” area, if it is inany of the following conditions, you maybe able to start the engine or select theignition mode. The “remote controlleroutside” warning may not be given atthat time.– The remote controller is outside the

vehicle but very close to a door.– The remote controller is on the instru-

ment panel.

��

64MS185

(1) To set(2) To release(3) To release

The parking brake lever is located betweenthe seats. To set the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down and pull the parkingbrake lever all the way up. To release theparking brake, hold the brake pedal down,pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,push the button on the end of the leverwith your thumb, and lower the lever to itsoriginal position.

(2)

(3)

(1)

��

� �� !�� "�� # �� "�� $$��% � ��&& �� "� �� $��'� ��%�� ("��$�'��"�&�� (�� !��'�� "�� '�� '��&�� )

� �$ ��!��"��&�� &��&�� $��&�(�� &!�� ''�� "�� )

��& &� �� !�� "�� $��"�$�� '��'� �(��&��*��'��)��!��('��&�� &��$ �� & �� &� �� $��& ��) ��'�'"��(� �� &�+�� & �� (��'�& &� ��!��"��$��)

��!�� + ��'�� ( �� $��!��&��"��&��#,- .� ��!��"��)/- 0�� $$ �� ( �� &��$ ��

�� &��$��& ��)1- �� $ �� !�

��& �� &) ��&� ��!��"��)

�� ( ��'�& ��'�'"�� $��& &� ��!��"��( ��'� � ��&)

1%,2

3��0��435�6�7�8��

��'��99��A buzzer sounds intermittently to remindyou to release the parking brake if you startthe vehicle without releasing the parkingbrake. Make sure that the parking brake isfully released and the brake system warninglight turns off.

��

80J2121

8�� :,-The clutch pedal is used to disengage thedrive to the wheels when starting theengine, stopping, or shifting the gearshiftlever. Depressing the pedal disengages theclutch.

��:/-Your vehicle is equipped with either frontand rear disc brakes or front disc brakesand rear drum brakes. Depressing thebrake pedal applies both sets of brakes.You may hear occasional brake squealwhen you apply the brakes. This is a nor-

mal condition caused by environmentalfactors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.

�� :1-This pedal controls the speed of theengine. Depressing the accelerator pedalincreases power output and speed.

��;�� $�� & �� !��) � �� &�� +��&&� �� (�� '��(��+!�� &&�$��"��)

(2)(1)

(3)

�� $� "�� &<�� &� �+��&&� �� &� �� '�� "��&� ��!!��(��&�� "��&�� "�� )

��;� �� "��& "� �!!�� ' �� &�� & �� $�� !��) 0��&�� &�� $ �� "��& �� &� ��!�� "�� "�� (��& �!!��& ��&(��!��'�� "��'��)

1%,,

3��0��435�6�7�8��

. �� :6�� =��&&��&�. �� .�& �'-�$��. ��

64MS146

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift into “N” (Neutral) and depress the

clutch pedal all the way to the floor. Holdthe clutch pedal while starting theengine.

. �� 8��'��8��Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-tion and wait until the glow plug indicatorgoes out if it comes on. Crank the engineby turning the ignition key to “START”.Release the key when the engine starts.

��'��Crank the engine by turning the ignitionkey to “START”. Release the key when theengine starts.8�� & �!!�� "��When stopping the engine after climbing orhigh speed driving, let the engine idle forabout one minute or more (if it is not pro-hibited) to cool down the turbocharger andengine oil. This is to prevent the engine oilfrom over-deteriorating. Deterioratedengine oil will damage the bearings of theturbocharger.��& �� &�� $ �� $��%�'! �& �!

If the engine stops and the low fuel warninglight and the malfunction indicator lightcome on, use the following procedure:1) Fill the fuel tank.2) Hold the ignition key in “ON” position for

5-10 seconds to feed fuel.3) Perform above engine starting proce-

dure to start the engine.If the malfunction indicator light still comes�on after the engine started, there may be�some problem with the engine. Ask your�� to have the�engine inspected.

�� &�� !��"��&

&� $�� &�+�� & �� "�$�� '! �� & �� )

� �� "� & �� $ ��!��&&�� !��) 7��%� ��( "�$�� !��&&�� !��'��&�� &�+��& �� "�� !�� &��!��&&��)

NOTICE� . �! �� & �� ''��%

� ��$ �� && �� & �� &�& �'��"��'��)

� ;� �� $�� '�� 12 &��& � � �'�) �$ ��&�> & �� $��& ��(�� "�� ,? &��& "�$�� %��)

1%,/

3��0��435�6�7�8��

. �� :6�� =��&&��&�. �� .�& �'-�$��. ��

64MS169

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress

the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch andbrake pedals fully depressed.

82K254

3) The “PUSH START SWITCH” messagewill appear on the information display inthe instrument cluster. Push the engineswitch (1). When the engine is started,the starter motor will automatically stop.

NOTE:• You do not need to keep the engine

switch pressed to start the engine.• The engine of a manual transaxle vehi-

cle will not start unless the clutch pedalis depressed.

• During the engine starting procedure,messages on the information display willhelp you. Refer to “Information Display”

in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section fordetails.

• You should turn off such loads as theheadlights and air conditioning system tofacilitate starting of the engine.

• Even if you fail to start the engine, thestarter motor will stop operating auto-matically after a short time. After thestarter motor has stopped or if there issome problem with the system, thestarter motor will rotate only while theengine switch is being pressed.

. �!!�� • Depress the engine switch to stop the

engine after the vehicle stopped com-pletely.

• In case of emergency, you can stop theengine by quickly pushing the engineswitch more than 3 times, or pushingand holding the engine switch more than2 seconds while the vehicle in motion.

NOTE:Except in emergency, do not stop theengine while the vehicle in motion.The steering and braking operation willrequire more efforts when the enginestopped.Refer to “Braking” in this section.• If the engine has been stopped and

stayed as it as for while after the enginewas stopped unexpectedly or was racedbefore stopped, a clicking sound may beheard from around the engine whenengine restarted. This is not a malfunc-

(1)

�� &�� !�� "�� &&� $�� &�+�� & ��% �� "�$�� '! �� & �� )

NOTICE� ;� �� !��&& ��

�� & �� !��%��)

� �$ �� & �� &!�� & �� &�� $ �� &�� & �� @�38=A :3BB- % @�88A % @3�A'��( �� "� �� '�� "��&��) 8�� $ �� "� �� "�$�� )

1%,1

3��0��435�6�7�8��

tion. In this case, always let the engineidle before stop it.

. �� 8��'��8��Depress the clutch and brake pedals fullyand press the engine switch to crank theengine. If the glow plug indicator lightcomes on, the engine will start automati-cally after the glow plug indicator light goesoff or 10 seconds past.

��'��Crank the engine by pressing the engineswitch to change the ignition mode to“START”.

8�� & �!!�� "��When stopping the engine after climbing orhigh speed driving, let the engine idle forabout one minute or more (if it is not pro-hibited) to cool down the turbocharger andengine oil. This is to prevent the engine oilfrom over-deteriorating. Deterioratedengine oil will damage the bearings of theturbocharger.��& �� &�� $ �� $��%�'! �& �!If the engine stops and the low fuel warn-ing light and the malfunction indicator lightcome on, use the following procedure:1) Fill the fuel tank.2) Press the engine switch to change the

ignition mode to “ON” for 5-10 secondsto feed fuel.

3) Perform above engine starting proce-dure to start the engine.

If the malfunction indicator light still comes�on after the engine started, there may be�some problem with the engine. Ask your�� to have the�engine inspected.�$ ��.0�� "��&�� "�& �� Your keyless push start system remotecontroller may not be sensed as beingwithin the interior workable area. Try againafter making sure that you have the remotecontroller with you. If the engine still can-not be started, the battery of the remotecontroller may be discharged. You must

then use the following method to be able tostart the engine.

58MST0302

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.2) Shift to “N” (Neutral) and fully depress

the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch andbrake pedals fully depressed.

3) The “PUSH START SWITCH.” mes-sage will appear on the information dis-play in the instrument cluster. Press theengine switch (1).

4) Within about 10 seconds of blinking ofthe “MASTER WARNING” indicatorlight in the instrument cluster, touch theengine switch with the lock button endof the remote controller (2) for about 2seconds.

NOTE:• If you still cannot start the engine after

several attempts using the above

NOTICE;� �� $�� '�� 12&��&� � �'�)�$ ��&�> & �� $��& ��(�� "�� ,?&��&"�$�� %��)

(1)

(2)

��

1%,C

3��0��435�6�7�8��

method, there may be a problem else-where, such as a low battery. Contact�your �� for� inspection.

• The immobilizer/keyless push start sys-tem warning light will come on for about5 seconds while the master warning indi-cator light is blinking. In addition, theinformation display will show a certainmessage during this time. Refer to“Information Display” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section for details.

• You may customize the system to causethe interior buzzer to sound once for theremote controller out of sensing rangewarning. Please contact an �� for thecustomization.

• If the battery of the remote controller isabout to be completely discharged, amessage warning this will appear on theinformation display when the ignitionmode is changed to “ON” by pressingthe engine switch. For details on replac-ing the battery, refer to the “KeylessPush Start System Remote Controller” inthe “BEFORE DRIVING” section.

�� '�� @�38=A:3BB-@�38=A:3BB-'��'��"�99��If the driver’s door is opened withoutreturning the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF) by pressing the engine switch, abuzzer sounds to warn you of this state.• If you open the driver’s door after press-

ing the engine switch to change the igni-tion mode to ACC, the interior buzzerbeeps intermittently.

• The buzzer will stop sounding if you thenpush the engine switch twice, thus bring-ing it back the ignition mode to “LOCK”(OFF).

NOTE:Whenever you leave the vehicle, makesure you have returned the ignition modeto “LOCK” (OFF) using the engine switchand then lock the doors. Without returningthe ignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF), youcannot use a request switch or keylesspush start system remote controller to lockthe doors.. ��"�99��If the steering lock fails to engage due to a�fault in the system when the ignition mode�is turned to “LOCK” (OFF) by pressing the�engine switch and then any door (including�the tailgate) is opened or closed, the inte-rior buzzer will warn you of this condition�with repeated short beeps. If this happens,�have the vehicle inspected by an �� .

5&�� 0��&�+��0��&�+��?�0'��

79MH0303

D�0'��

61MS2A004

. �� $$To start off, depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor and shift into 1st gear.After releasing the parking brake, gradually

��

��

1%,?

3��0��435�6�7�8��

release the clutch. When you hear achange in the engine’s sound, slowly pressthe accelerator while continuing to gradu-ally release the clutch..��$ ��All forward gears are synchronized, whichprovides for quiet, and easy shifting.Always depress the clutch pedal all theway to the floor before shifting gears.Ensure that the engine rpm does not riseto the red zone of the tachometer.

61MS2A005

Reverse gear (6MT model): while lifting upthe ring, shift the gearshift lever to therightmost position and engage the gear.

;��&��$ ��'�+�'�'��"��&!��&?�0'��

D�0'��

*NOTE:You may not accelerate to the maximumallowable speed because of the driving sit-uation and/or the vehicle condition.

��

Downshifting km/h (mph)

2nd to 1st 35 (22)

3rd to 2nd 65 (40)

4th to 3rd 100 (62)

5th to 4th 145 (90)*

Downshifting km/h (mph)

2nd to 1st 40 (25)

3rd to 2nd 70 (43)

4th to 3rd 115 (71)

5th to 4th 160 (99)*

6th to 5th 200 (124)*

NOTICE�� &��$ �� ('�� &�� &��$ � ��&!�� $�& �� '�+�'�'��"�� &!��& $�� + ��&!��(��&� ��'��&�� )

�� &!�� &��$

�� "�$�� & ��! ��) � �� !�� "��)� �� "��&�� '�� ( ��&�� "��$��)

� �� &��!!��&("�&�� &�� "�$�� %&��$ ��) �+��&&� � ��E�� &��& �� &!�� '��&��&&�$ �� (��&�� &�� )

NOTICE�� &�� & ��'%!�� & � �� "�$�� &��$ �� &�)

NOTICE� 0� ��! � �� '��( ��

�� &� �� !��&�$�� %��& �� &� �� ! �� & � ��&��!�) ;�!��&& �� $��&��$ ��)

� ��&��$ ��& �� $$(�� )�� &�� $� �� &�� $$�� &'�� &��$ ��)

1%,D

3��0��435�6�7�8��

8��&�8�� :�$�<��!!��-The cruise control system allows you tomaintain a steady speed without keepingyour foot on the accelerator pedal. Thecontrols for operating the cruise controlsystem are on the steering wheel.You can use the cruise control system withthe following conditions:• The gear position is in 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th

(if equipped).• The vehicle speed is about 40 km/h (25

mph) or higher.61MS416

(1) “CRUISE” switch(2) “CANCEL” switch(3) “RES +” switch(4) “SET –” switch

0�.� 8��&��.!��1) Turn on the cruise control system by

pushing the “CRUISE” switch (1). Whenthe “CRUISE” indicator light comes on,you can set cruising speed.

2) Accelerate or decelerate to the desiredspeed.

3) Push the “SET –” switch (4) and the“SET” indicator light will turn on. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal andthe set speed will be maintained.

��0��!� ��&&�$ �� (�� &� ��&�� &�& �'�� $$��(��&��!%!�� &( �� & ��!��&)

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

��$ �� &�� &!�� & &� "� ��%�� (�� '��&� �� $ �� ) 0��&�� (��&�� &� ��*�� )0�� $$ �� &� �� &�& �'��'��&�� @8�5�.�A��% �� &�$$�� &�& �'�&�� &�)

1%,F

3��0��435�6�7�8��

@8�5�.�A��

52D113

When you push the “CRUISE” switch, thesystem is on and a “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument cluster will be on.@.�0A��

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled bythe cruise control system, a “SET” indica-tor light on the instrument cluster will beon.0�8��.!��0�'!��When the cruising speed is maintained,you can temporarily accelerate or deceler-ate.To accelerate, depress the acceleratorpedal. When you take your foot off thepedal, your vehicle will return to the setspeed.

To decelerate, depress the brake pedal.The set speed will be canceled and “SET”indicator light will go off.To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the“SET” indicator light again when vehiclespeed is above 40 km/h (25 mph). Thevehicle will accelerate to and maintain thepreviously set speed.

0�8��8��&��.!��5&�� !��To reset at a faster cruising speed, accel-erate to the desired speed using the accel-erator pedal and push the “SET –” switch(4). The new speed will be maintained.5&�� "��!��To reset at a slower cruising speed, decel-erate to the desired speed using the brakepedal and push the “SET –” switch (4). Thenew speed will be maintained.NOTE:When the brake pedal is depressed, the“SET” indicator light goes off until the cruis-ing speed is reset.5&�� @��.GA&�� @.�0HA&�� To reset at a faster cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold push the “RES +” switch(3). Vehicle speed will steadily increase.When you release the switch, the newspeed will be maintained.To reset at a slower cruising speed, pressrepeatedly or hold push the “SET –” switch(4) until the vehicle has slowed to thedesired speed, then release the switch.The new speed will be maintained.NOTE:You can adjust the set speed by approxi-mately 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) by pushing the“RES +” switch (3) or the “SET –” switch(4) quickly.

1%,I

3��0��435�6�7�8��

8�� $ ��8��&�8�� The “SET” indicator light will go off and thecruise control will be canceled temporarilywith following procedures:• Push the “CANCEL” switch (2).• Depress the brake pedal.• Depress the clutch pedal.• The vehicle speed falls more than about

20 percent from the set speed.• Any time the vehicle speed falls below

40 km/h (25 mph).To resume the previously set speed, pushthe “RES +” switch (3) and turn on the“SET” indicator light. Besides, the vehiclespeed has to be above 40 km/h (25 mph)when the vehicle is not in the above condi-tions.To turn off the cruise control system, pushthe “CRUISE” switch (1) and make surethe “CRUISE” indicator light is off.Also, if the malfunction indicator light in theinstrument cluster comes on or blinks, thecruise control system will be turned off.NOTE:If you turn off the cruise control system, thepreviously set speed in the memory iscleared. Reset your cruising speed again.

��.��&��&:�$�<��!!��-

61MM0A192

(1) Symbol representing an obstacledetected by parking sensor** This symbol represents an obstacle

that is located to the right rear atthe vehicle.

• The parking sensor system uses ultra-sonic sensors to detect obstacles nearthe rear bumper. If obstacles are sensedwhile you are parking or moving thevehicle slowly, the system warns you bysounding a buzzer and displaying sym-bols representing the obstacles on theinformation display in the instrumentcluster.

• The system emits an ultrasonic waveand the relevant sensor detects thereturn of the wave reflected by an obsta-cle. The system measures the timetaken by the ultrasonic wave to reach theobstacle and return from it, from which itdetermines the obstacle’s position.

• The parking sensor function can be usedwhen you press the engine switch to

change the ignition mode to “ON”, thegearshift lever is in “R” position and theparking sensor switch is in the “ON”position. This function is helpful in thefollowing cases: pulling over to the curb;parallel-parking the vehicle; steering thevehicle into a garage; driving along analley; and moving slowly in a place withobstacles.

(1)��

� 0�� !�� &��&�� & �� $�"& ��& �� "�99��& �� "�&�� $ ��"& ��& �� $��'� �� &%!��) 7�� ( �� '�& & �� !��$�� &��$�� )

� 0�� &��&��& �� "& ��&�� '� �� &'� �� '� �� &!�� ) .�( �� &( �� '�& '� � �� &�� &�� &�� '��&) 0�� & ��&�� &��$�� $�� %�� !��&��%&��)

NOTICE��&��&��&��$�� >&�&&�& ��

1%,J

3��0��435�6�7�8��

.��&�� &3� ��"�'!��

64MS170

(1) Rear center sensors (2 places) (2) Rear corner sensors (2 places)

��&��&��&The sensors that work depends on theposition of the gearshift lever as follows:

�!!��+�'� ��&��"& ��&��"��

64MS007

• Any obstacle within about 20 cm (8 in)from the sensor or just below the sensoris not detectable.

• The sensors can detect an obstacle upto about 1.5 m (5 ft) from the rear ofvehicle.

NOTICE� � �� &��&�� & ��

�� 99��$��%!��&%&�� &�� &��&��&)3 ��&�( ��&��&��&'��"��'��)

� �$ ��"�'!�� &��"*�� ( ��&��&��&�� '�� !��!%��)�$� ��&��&(�� &��%�&��&� ��&!�� "��

(1)(2) (2)(1)

��&��$ �� !�&� �� (

,& H? ��D �

Rear sensors

Center On OffCorner On Off

��

�� 5�� $�� &( ��

!�� &��&�� &�& �' '�� '��"��&� ��&��&��&�� "& ��&�� )H .��&��& �� '��(

�� '� ��&):.��'� �%��&'�& "��'� ��$��'��!�� )-

H .��&��& �� $��' �� &!��&��&�� )

H .��&��& �� "� � ��(& ��(��&&��(� �)

H 0�� & �� &&�� "*�� &��%&��>&&��&��)

H � �'& &�� & �� &( ��'%'�� "�� !��&(�� ( � �) �� & �� "�'!��)

H 0�� $ �� "�'!�� &�� &�&!��&�� &�&)

H 0�� &��&�� & �� + ��'�� $��' �� &�� $��9�� )

H 0�� &��&��$��(&��!�(�� &&$��)

H 0�� &� �& ��!��)H .��&��& �� ! �� %

&�� &� $��' �� %��>& ��( �� "��&�& �' :�� &-( �� !��%��&��&��)

(Continued)

1%/2

3��0��435�6�7�8��

NOTE:• Thin poles or obstacles lower than the

sensors may become undetectable asthe vehicle moves closer to them even ifthey have been detected from longerdistances.

• The distance calculated by the system toa road sign or similar obstacle may beshorter than the actual distance.

��(Continued)

H 3"& ��& �� &� � ��&��&��&)

H .��&��& �� $�� "*�� &�� &��&&) :5� ��&�� & �� $�� "��$��' ��"& ��)-

� .��&��& '�� "� �"�� %�� $�� !�& �$�"& ��&#H 3"*�� & '�� $ � �� '� ��

�� !�&H .<��%&��!�� "& ��& ��

� ��"*�� &�� &��!��&H 0��"*�� &�� !!��!��

��&��H ��%!��$��"*�� &&��&��"%

& ��&H .��%�"&��"��"*�� &&��&

�� &��

1%/,

3��0��435�6�7�8��

7�� 5&� ��.��&��&��&��&��

61MS403

(1) Parking sensor switch(2) Indicator

(2)

(1)

• When the ignition mode is “ON” and the indicator light in the parking sensor switch is on,indicating that the parking sensor is ready for operation under the following conditions:– The gearshift lever is in the “R” position.– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 9 km/h (6 mph) when

decelerating the vehicle such as for parking.– The vehicle’s forward moving speed is not more than approx. 13 km/h (9 mph) when

accelerating.• To deactivate the parking sensor, push the parking sensor switch and make sure the

indicator light goes off.

NOTE:If you push the parking sensor switch from the OFF to ON position when the ignition modehas been changed to ON by pressing the engine switch, the inside buzzer sounds.

.�� !�&� �� . � �

��ON• When the indicator light is on and all necessary conditions are

met, system becomes ready for operation.

��OFF• The system does not operate. Push the switch to turn off the

indicator if you do not wish to use the parking sensor.

1%//

3��0��435�6�7�8��

3"& �� "��.��%&��

64MS008

(1) Obstacle detected by rear center sen-sors

(2) Obstacle detected by rear corner sen-sors

(1) (2)(2)

��

Upon detecting an obstacle, the parking sensor causes an interior buzzer to sound and asymbol representing the obstacle appears on the information display in the instrumentcluster.• A different symbol is displayed depending on the direction and distance of the obstacle.• A buzzer located behind the rear seat sounds when a sensor at the rear detects an

obstacle.• Warnings when obstacles are detected by corner sensors

• Warnings when obstacles are detected by center sensors

NOTE:• Symbols are displayed with a short delay after the detection of obstacles.• If the system detects multiple obstacles simultaneously, the display shows all of their

positions using the corresponding symbols. However, the buzzers will sound only forthe nearest obstacles.

;�& ��:�!!��+)- �99�� .�'"��45 – 60 cm(18 – 24 in) Short beeps at short intervals Three lines

35 – 45 cm(14 – 18 in) Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines

Less than 35 cm(14 in) Continuous beep One line

;�& ��:�!!��+)- �99�� .�'"��60 – 150 cm(24 – 59 in) Short beeps at long intervals

Three lines45 – 60 cm(18 – 24 in) Short beeps at short intervals

35 – 45 cm(14 – 18 in) Short beeps at very short intervals Two lines

Less than 35 cm (14 in) Continuous beep One line

1%/1

3��0��435�6�7�8��

.� .��&��&You can select either the normal or trailermode of the parking sensor via the informa-tion display. Refer to “Information Display”in the “BEFORE DRIVING” section.��'��'��All sensors operate. Use this mode undernormal conditions.0��'��The rear corner and rear center sensors areinhibited from operating. Use this modewhen towing a trailer.

NOTICE�� &�� '�� '�� &&�� !�� &��&�� & �� )�$ ��!��&��&��&��$ �� '��( �� &��&��&�� $�� %��)

�� &&��&If there is a problem or warning regarding the parking sensor system, a message is dis-played on the information display in the instrument cluster, and a symbol blinks and thebuzzer sounds. If a message is displayed, follow its instruction.

��&&�� .�'"�� 99�� "�"��&��'��Two blinking lines in a sen-sor location.

Series of double beeps

There may be problem with the parking sensor system.Have your vehicle inspected by an �� .

One blinking line in a sensor location.

Series of single beeps

The indicated sensor is contami-nated.Wipe it clean with a soft cloth.

1%/C

3��0��435�6�7�8��

�� 8�'��:�$�<��!!��-When the gearshift lever is shifted to the“R” position while the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position or the ignition mode isON, the rearview camera system automati-cally shows the view behind the vehicle onthe display.

�� 8�'��

64MS144

(1) Rearview cameraThe rearview camera is installed besidethe license plate light.

��0�� & �� '�� '�� $$�� $��' �� & �� $�� &��%��).�� '��&!��& ��&� ��'� ��( "�� ! "� �� &!��'��&�� &�� "*�� )

0�� '�� !�� >& � �� ) 0�� & ��&!��&�"�� $��!��&�'�� '�� &)� 5&� �� '��

!�� &&�& ��)� ��& �� $�� $��'��

�� &�$� ��$ �� &��%�� & "� �� & �� &�� '��)

� �� &�� &&��&��"��!)

NOTICE�$��&� �� '�� $�� '�� &�� &�� @3�A !�&� �� '�� & 3�( "� �� & �� ( ��"� ��'��&��)

;�� &�� @3�A !�&� �� '��3�$�� '�� &�� )

NOTICE0�� '�� & � !��&��& ��'�� ) �$��& �� '��(� '�� "�� &� ��'��&�� $��'��$�� )

� ;�� & �� '��)� ;�� '� �&��'��

��'��&�� & ��)

(1)��

(1)

(1)

1%/?

3��0��435�6�7�8��

NOTE:If body wax does get on the camera lens,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted withwater, then wipe with a dry cloth.

7�� 5&�� 8�'��1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position or press the engine switch tochange the ignition mode to ON.

2) Shift the gearshift lever in the “R” posi-tion.• The display automatically shows the

view behind the vehicle.• When the gearshift lever is shifted

from “R” to another gearshift leverposition, the display returns to theprevious display.

NOTE:• Images shown on the display from the

rearview camera are reversed images(mirror images).

• The colors of objects on the rearviewcamera may differ from the actual objectcolors.

• The rearview camera display has firstpriority in any display mode. However,the rearview camera display does notshow the rear view while the system isinitializing.

;�&!��$�� 8�'��The rearview camera display shows thearea behind the rear end of the tailgate.The display cannot show objects which areclose to the bumper or under the bumper.The rearview camera display cannot showobstacles which are higher than the cam-era. Upper parts of tall objects such asroad signs cannot be viewed on the dis-play.

�+�'!�� $ ��&!�� $ �� '��

61MM0A015

61MM0B012

(1) Display rangeNOTE:• Images shown on the display from the

rearview camera are reversed images(mirror images).

NOTICE�$�� & �� '��(� '�� &� � '��$�� $��)

;� �� &� �� !��&&�� '��)

NOTICE0�� '�� & �& �� !�� '�� &�� );�'��&�� $��&'��"&�� '��)

� ;�� &��"��&� ��&)� ;� �� &� ��( "��9��

�� &)� ;�� &��+�� '��&)

��

��

(1)(1)

(3)(2)

(3) (2)

1%/D

3��0��435�6�7�8��

• The colors of objects on the rearviewcamera may differ from the actual objectcolors.

• The rearview camera display may be dif-ficult to see under the following condi-tions, but this is not a systemmalfunction.– In dark areas, on a rainy day or at

night.– When the temperature around the lens

is too high/low, or the camera is wetsuch as on a rainy day or during peri-ods of high humidity (dew condensa-tion may occur on the camera lens).

– When a foreign object such as mud ora drop of water is stuck around thecamera lens.

– When strong light directly enters thecamera (vertical lines may be seen onthe display).

– Under fluorescent light. (The displaymay flicker.)

– When the outside temperature is low(the image on the display may bedarkened).

�+�'!�� $ �� '�� &�� The distance viewed in the rearview cam-era may differ from the actual distanceaccording to the condition of the road orthe load the vehicle is carrying.

5!��"�� 6��

61MM0A016

(1) Object(2) Actual distance(3) Distance on the display

When there is an uphill incline behind thevehicle, the object shown on the displayappears farther away than the actual dis-tance.

;��"��

61MM0A017

(1) Object(2) Actual distance(3) Distance on the display

When there is a downhill incline behind thevehicle, the object shown on the displayappears closer than the actual distance.

��

��

1%/F

3��0��435�6�7�8��

�$ �� $��' �� '%�� & �� &�� & � !��'��• If the rear view from the rearview camera

is not shown.– Check to make sure that the ignition

switch is in the “ON” position or theignition mode is “ON”.

– Check to make sure that the gearshiftlever is shifted to the “R” position.

• If the image from the rearview camera ispoor.– Check to make sure that the camera

lens is not dirty.– Check to make sure that light from the

sun or the beam of the headlights fromthe vehicle behind is not shiningdirectly into the lens.

If the rearview camera system is still not�working properly after checking the above,�have the system inspected by an �� as soon as�possible.

��

60G165S

The distance needed to bring any vehicle toa halt increases with the speed of the vehi-cle. The braking distance needed, for exam-ple, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will beapproximately 4 times greater than thebraking distance needed at 30 km/h (19mph). Start to brake the vehicle when thereis plenty of distance between your vehicleand the stopping point, and slow downgradually.

��%�&&�& ��&:�$�<��!!��-Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes. Ifpower assistance is lost due to a stalledengine or other failures, the system is stillfully operational on reserve power and youcan bring the vehicle to a complete stop bypressing the brake pedal once and holdingit down. The reserve power is partly usedup when you depress the brake pedal andreduces each time the pedal is pressed.Apply smooth and even pressure to thepedal. Do not pump the pedal.

��$�� & �� "�� &("��!��$��'��'��"��'�!�� !�� "��) �$ �� &�� &�� $ �� ( �& �� "��&�� &��&!�� &��$ �� '�� '��$$�� &&) �$ �� "��& �� &&�$$�� '��( �� ' "�� &�� "��& �� '��$$�� &&)

�� &�� !�� "�� &�& �'( �� & �� & �! �� "� !��&&�� "�� !�� '�� <��)7��%� ��( �� & �!!�� & �� '�� "��)

1%/I

3��0��435�6�7�8��

��&&�& .�& �':�$�<��!!��-When you slam the brakes on, the brakeassist system judges as an emergencystop and provides more powerful brakingfor a driver who cannot hold down thebrake pedal firmly.NOTE:If you quickly and forcefully depress thebrakes, you may hear a clicking sound inthe brake pedal. This is normal and indi-cates that the brake assist system is acti-vated properly.

�� %��.�& �':�.-:�$�<��!!��- ABS will help in avoiding locking of thewheel by electronically controlling brakingpressure. It will also help you maintainsteering control when braking on slipperysurfaces or when braking hard”

The ABS works automatically, so you donot need any special braking technique.Just push the brake pedal down withoutpumping. The ABS will operate wheneverit senses that the wheels are locking up.You may feel the brake pedal moves a littlewhile the ABS is operating.

NOTE:The ABS will not work if vehicle speed isunder about 10 km/h (6 mph).

63J081

(1) ABS warning light(2) Brake system warning light

�� 3� &�'� �!�& �$ ��&� &��$��&

:&�� & �� ( &��%�� &( � �)- �� & �!!�� & ��<��$��.%�<��!!�� %��'��"�&�� $�� '!��"�� % �� "��&�& �')�� % �� "�� &�& �'( &�� &��"�� !�� &�� ( &�� & �!%!��& ��)�.'��'�9�& ��&��&�& �� $$�� ) �� $�� + ��& �!!��& �� &�&��$��&)

� 3��!� ��&(&�'�� %��& '�� "� �"�� " �� &�� &�� & �!!�� & ��& �� "�� &�& �'& �� .)

� �� "� � �$ �� "� � �� &(�.��& ��$$�� $��!�� '�� ) 7�� ( ��'�'"�� . �� '!��&� � $�� "�� &��!�� *��'�� ) 5&� �� *��%'�� $�& �� &��&�$��)

(1)(2)

1%/J

3��0��435�6�7�8��

7�� .��&A computer continuously monitors wheelspeed. The computer compares thechanges in wheel speed when braking. Ifthe wheels slow suddenly, indicating askidding situation, the computer willchange braking pressure several timeseach second to prevent the wheels fromlocking. When you start your vehicle orwhen you accelerate after a hard stop, youmay hear a momentary motor or clickingnoise as the system resets or checksitself." This is absolutely normal and indi-cates that ABS is functioning properly"

�� $ ��.�� :,-��

��& ��'�� !�� '�&� �� & ��&�� (� ��'��"��!��"��'�� .&�& �')��&�� &!�� &�& �'� �''�� )� �$� �� .�&�& �'� "��'�&��!�� (� ��"��&�& �'��$�� &��"��&�& �' �� &��.)

� �$ ��.�� :,-�� &�& �'�� :/-�� & ��'�� !�� &�'�� %��&��& ��&� �� '�&� �� ("� �� %��$�� "�� $�� $�� :!��!�� $�� -� �$� ��.&�& �''�� $��)�$�&�( ��&'��&��&�� &!�� & ��&��"��&��!!�� "�� !� ��)�&�� &!�� .�&�& �'�''�� );�� $��(� ��"��&'��&!�&&�"��)

��0�� . '�� !��!�� $ ��& �� & � �� &�&!��$�� >& '�� &��)0��&�&"��&� ��.��&"� ��'!�� & �� &!��) �� !�� & ��&( �&� �� &�9� �� !�&!��$�� &��>&'��)

;��6��0��.

;��6��0��.��%�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%,8� �� 8�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%,�'!�� B��'� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%/7��;�� )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%1;�� 7��&)))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%1;�� .��!!��& ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) C%C;�>&��;�� >&$��.�$�;�� )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))C%D

4

C%,

;��6��0��.

52D078

��%�� 8� �� 8��

80G106

The purpose of the catalytic converter is tominimize the amount of harmful pollutantsin your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leadedfuel in vehicles equipped with catalyticconverters is prohibited, because leaddeactivates the pollutant-reducing compo-nents of the catalyst system.The converter is designed to last the life ofthe vehicle under normal usage and whenunleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-nance is required on the converter. How-ever, it is very important to keep the engineproperly tuned. Engine misfiring, which canresult from an improperly tuned engine,may cause overheating of the catalyst.This may result in permanent heat damageto the catalyst and other vehicle compo-nents.

�� 435�.��0��0.�0��

0��.)� � �� "��&��<��!!�� $�� &�� !�&�%� ��&( �� !�&&��&�&��"�!��!��& �� '�&(� �&�� &�� "�� &� !��%� ��)��$�� @.�� &��8��& �� .�& �'&A�&�� $��& �� &�� !��!��&��$� ��&�� "�� &)

� �� $��%�� $ �� &)�� & �� &��&��'!�� "�� &�$��(�� &�� &��$��*�� &��$�� &)4��&��&� � �� ( &��( �� ( �� & ��&&)

NOTICE0�� $� �� !��$��'�� "��%� ��$ ��!��&�� & �� +��&�� &��$�)� �&�&!��'!�� "&�� $�� !�� &�� JD2 �' :D22'��&-�$ ��!�� )� �$ �� & �� ( ��

��)��'� �!��)� � ��!�� !��

� � ��& �� &!��) �� !�� &��"��"� ��$�� &!��)

� . �� $$ $��'�& �!&��)� ��$�� & �� &)

� � �� "��( �&!�� $��& 1/2�':/22'��&-�$�� )

� ;�� &�� &%�+��)

� ;�� '�� &!��&)

� ;�� $��& JD2�':D22'��&-�$ ��!��%� ��)

C%/

;��6��0��.

54G584S

�'!�� B��'�The following instructions will help youimprove fuel economy.� ��+��&&� ��If you are to wait for more than a minutewhile you are parked, stop the engine andstart it again later. When warming up acold engine, allow the engine to idle untilthe temperature gauge pointer comes upto the “C” position (if the idling is not pro-hibited). In this position, the engine is suffi-ciently warm for starting off.� ��$�& & �� &Fast starts away from lights or stop signswill consume fuel unnecessarily andshorten engine life. Start off slowly.� ��&&��& �!&Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speedwhenever possible. Slowing down andthen accelerating again uses more fuel.=��!�& ��&��&!��Keep as constant a speed as road andtraffic conditions will permit.=��!�� '��'�'The heavier the load, more the fuel vehicleconsumes. Take out any luggage or cargowhen it is not necessary.=��! ��!��&&��&�� Underinflation of the tires can waste fueldue to increased running resistance of thetires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct

NOTICE0�'��'�9� ��!�&&�"�� $�� & �� '��#� �� !��!��

�!�� )� �� $��'��$��%

��( !�� '�&$�� !!�� &&�$!��$��'��(�� %��&�� !��'! ��)

� ;�� $$ �� %��! �� &�+��& �� & ��'� ��)

� ;� �� & �� "�!�&�� ( ��& ��)

� ;� �� &!�� !�� & ��&�� '� ��( &��&��&% �� & ��)

� ;� �� $�� !��%�� !��& �$ �� &��'&�� '��$��% ��&)

� ;� �� $�� '! �� )

��$��!�� K �� +��& ��'!�� & �� )�&�� (�� !��!�� & ��&��'"�& �"�� '� ��& &�� & ��&&�� &��'�� +��& &�& �' ��'!�%�� &)

4-3

DRIVING TIPS

64MS0-74E

pressure shown on the label on the driver’sside door or the driver’s door lock pillar.

Highway DrivingWhen driving at highway speeds, payattention to the following:• Stopping distance progressively

increases with vehicle speed. Apply thebrakes far enough ahead of the stoppingpoint to allow for the extra stopping dis-tance.

• On rainy days, hydroplaning can occur.Hydroplaning is the loss of direct contactbetween the road surface and the vehi-cle’s tires due to a water film formingbetween them. Steering or braking thevehicle while hydroplaning can be verydifficult, and loss of control can occur.Keep speed down when the road sur-face is wet.

• At high speeds, the vehicle may beaffected by side winds. Therefore,reduce speed and be prepared for unex-pected buffeting, which can occur at theexits of tunnels, when passing by a cutof a hill, or when being overtaken bylarge vehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

64MS171

• When climbing steep hills, the vehiclemay begin to slow down and show a lackof power. If this happens, you shouldshift to a lower gear so that the enginewill again be operating in its normalpower range. Shift rapidly to prevent thevehicle from losing momentum.

• When driving down a hill, the engineshould be used for braking by shifting tonext lower gear.

While moving uphill/gradient from a stand still condition • Apply the parking brake firmly so that the

vehicle does not roll backwards.• Depress the Clutch pedal and Shift the

gearshift lever to 1st Select position.• Do not slip the clutch.• When ready to start, press accelerator

pedal and slowly release the clutchpedal simultaneously. When the vehiclestarts to move, gradually release theparking brake.

WARNINGTry not to hold the brake pedal downtoo long or too often while goingdown a steep or long hill. This couldcause the brakes to overheat, result-ing in reduced braking efficiency.Failure to take this precaution couldresult in loss of vehicle control.

NOTICEWhen descending a down hill,NEVER turn the ignition key to the“LOCK” position or press the engineswitch to change the ignition mode toLOCK (OFF). Emission control sys-tem damage may result.

C%C

;��6��0��.

;�� .��!!��&

60G089A

Under wet road conditions you shoulddrive at a lower speed than on dry roadsdue to possible slippage of tires duringbraking. When driving on icy, snow-cov-ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speedand avoid sudden acceleration, abruptbraking, or sharp steering movements.

0��8��&Tire chains should only be used if they areneeded to increase traction or are requiredby law. Make sure that the chains you useare the correct size for your vehicle’s tires.Also make sure that there is enough clear-ance between the fenders and the chainsas installed on the tires.Install the chains on the front tires tightly,according to the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. Retighten the chains afterdriving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.

�$4��6�� &. ��If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud, orsand, follow the directions below:1) Shift the transaxle back and forth

between first gear and reverse. This willcreate a rocking motion which may giveyou enough momentum to free thevehicle. Press gently on the acceleratorto keep wheel spinning to a minimumwheel rpm. Remove your foot from theaccelerator while shifting.Do not race the engine. Excessivewheel spin will cause the tires to digdeeper, making it more difficult to freethe vehicle.

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few�minutes of rocking, we recommend you�to consult your �� or a roadside assistance service.� If a towing service is not available in an� emergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed by a towing cable or� chain secured to the towing hook either� on the front of the vehicle or on the rear�of the vehicle. Refer to “Frame Hooks”� in the “OTHER CONTROLS AND�EQUIPMENT” section.

NOTICE� �$ �� & ��

��& �� "�� %��(& �!�� ')

� �$�� &�<��!!�� $��!&(��'� � ��!&"�$�� & �� & �� !&��"��'��"� ��"��&)

C%?

;��6��0��.

54G638

��;� �� & �� (�� &!�� & $�& �� C2 �'E� :/? '!�-�� &!��'� ��) ��&�� *��E �� '�� '�� &�� $��'&!�� & ��$�& )

NOTICE;� �� $�� '�� $�� '�� &) ��%�� &� �� &�+��'��)

NOTICE� �� &( � ��

�� '�� $& �� ) ��'�� $ �� '!�� '�� '�� &��'�� % ��'!�� &)

� �$& ��!�� (�� & �� )

� �� &��'!��&&�"��&�"& ��(�� &�� '�� )

�� $�� !&�� &&�� ( � �& �'!�� "&�� $��!�� &)� �� &�� & ��

�� &'�� &!��$�� !��&&��) ��$�� @0��&A �� @��.��80�3�A ��;��0��8�A &�� $�� &)

� �� &� � ��&�9�� & �� &!�%�� &�� "&��"��& �� &!��& ��&�:*��!-�� )0��&�� %�& ��&)3 ��&�9�� &'��&��"��& �� $�� "�'!&(��&�� '�� $��%��

� �$ �� ( �& ��"��& �� &��&!�� &�� $ �� '��% �� '��( �� ' "��!�� !!�� "��&�� &�� "��&�� '��$$�� &&)

� ;� �� &� ��& � �� &�&!��$�� "� ��50� .5L5=�)�� &� ��$$�� &�9�& �� !�&�$ ��& �� $�� &) B�� $��'� �� &!��$�� &(��$�� 0��$��'� �� "�� >&��!��)

C%D

;��6��0��.

;�>&��;�� >&$��.�$�;�� Exercise care in handling your vehicle. Beconscious of not only your own safety butalso the safety of others on the road, andthus enjoy the best and most comfortabledriving experience.

This section contains basic rules for safedriving. Read it carefully for good under-standing of the content so that you canenjoy safe and pleasant driving in your vehicle.

. �� 1) Adjust the driver’s seat for the proper

driving posture.2) Adjust the rear view mirror so as to

obtain the best possible rear view.3) Before moving off, look forward and

back to confirm safety.

4) Don’t start quickly, since it is dangerousand wastes fuel.

�� 1) Be sure to stop before the stop light and

stop sign. When moving into the inter-section without any traffic lights orsigns, drive slowly to confirm safety.

72F-08-002

2) Always follow other vehicles at a safedistance in order to prevent a rear-endcollision, in case the vehicle aheadmake a sudden stop.

3) Turn ON the turn signal at least 30meters before making a turn or chang-ing the lane so as not to be hit frombehind.

4) Before entering a corner, decelerate toa safe speed. Don’t apply brakes duringcornering, or a cornering skid mayoccur.

5) When overtaking other vehicles, watchout for the oncoming vehicle and care-fully confirm the safety.

6) Don’t attempt zigzag driving which willhinder your control over the vehicle andcause an accident.

72F-08-011

��1) Use the parking brake when parking

your vehicle and shift the gear shiftlever into the first gear or reverse gearposition for the sake of safety.

C%F

;��6��0��.

2) Don’t use hand-braking unless una-voidable. It causes the vehicle to skidand a rearend collision occur. It is espe-cially dangerous when the tyres areworn, for they allow a larger skid.

72F-08-012

Use foot brake in three stages1. Warn the vehicle behind you2. Gradually apply the brake.3. Bring the vehicle to a halt.

3) When driving on a downhill, try not toapply the brake but use the enginebrake effectively. Overuse of the footbrake may result in total brake failure.

4) Avoid reckless high speed driving andtry to drive at a safe speed suitable forthe road conditions while maintaining aconstant speed.

72F-08-015

5) The higher the speed, the narrower thedriver’s visual range becomes. In sucha state, it is difficult to anticipate anyhazard and the driver feels muchfatigued.

6) Never do sharp handling during highspeed driving. You will lose your controlover your vehicle.

7) When overtaking or changing the lanewhile driving at a high speed, keep anample vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

��& �� 1) Be sure to perform safety checks before

starting a trip.2) Take rest at certain intervals to prevent

an accident which may occur when youare sleepy or tired.

72F-08-020

�� '�� 1) Drive more slowly at night than in the

daytime, for the visual range isrestricted at night.

2) Don’t overtake other vehicles at night.Darkness bothers your sense of speedand hinders your judgment on the vehi-cle-to-vehicle distance.

3) Don’t use the high headlight beamunless its use is inevitable. Its dazzlemay blitz the driver of the oncomingvehicle, thus causing an accident.

4) Always keep the window glasses clean.Don’t operate the windshield wiper

C%I

;��6��0��.

when the windshield glass is dry or thewiper blade and glass may get dam-aged.

72F-08-021

72F-08-022

��B��.�$� �It is important to allow yourself a margin forsafety during driving so that you can copewith erroneous or unexpected driving of otherdrivers. For that, observe the following.

• Drive at a safe speed.• Maintain a sufficient distance between

your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.• Don’t force yourself to overtake other

vehicles.• Don’t make quick start, hard steering or

sudden stops.• Allow an ample time in the driving

schedule.• Observe traffic rules and regulations.

8��&��A perfect driver does not exist. Theendeavour of every motorist should be tostrive for perfection. Safety consciousnessnot only ensures your safety and the safetyof other road users, it also helps reducethe wear and tear on your vehicle, prolongsits life, gives more mileage and ensures acomfortable driving experience.B�� >& �� > & ��& ��( �� "� ��&�'��)

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0B��B��;��E8�! )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,��7�� )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%/.��6�&�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%C�� )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%?��&&��.�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%F�&&�& ��!&:�$�<��!!��- )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%I�� + )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%J3 ��8��&��:�$�<��!!��-)))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%J8�!7��. �� )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,,B�� & :�$�<��!!��- ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,CB�� &:�$�<��!!��- ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,C��8�'!�� '�� 7��&))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,?��8�'!�� '�� 8� ��:�$�<��!!��- ))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,?��8�'!�� '�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,?��$��&��$��&:�$�<��!!��-))))))))))))))) ?%,DB��'�7��& ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%,F��8�� .�& �' )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%/2��7�� 8�� .�& �' ))))))))))))))))) ?%/,�� '� ��7�� 8�� .�& �':8��'� �8�� - ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%/D�� ))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%1,��& �� $��B��<��0��&'� ��&)))))))))))))))))) ?%1,��.�& �':�$�<��!!��-)))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))) ?%1/

5

?%,

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B��B��;��E8�!

64MS137

64MS070

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rearside of the vehicle. The fuel filler lid can beunlocked by pulling up the opener leverlocated on the outboard side of the driver’sseat and locked by simply closing the door.

57L51093

To remove the fuel filler cap:1) Open the fuel filler lid.2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

61MM0B104

NOTE:The cap holder (1) holds the fuel filler cap(2) by hooking the cap to the groove (3)when refueling.

To reinstall the fuel filler cap:1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear

several clicks.2) Close the fuel filler lid.

��

��

8�50�3��'� � ��$��$��!&��)0��$��'��"��!��&&��'��&!�� (��&��*��)

Open Close

��

��B�� & �+ ��'�� $��''�"��);�� &'�� $��( �� '��&�� !�� $��'�& ��&!��&�� )

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(1)

��

?%/

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��7��

64MS138

To open the engine hood:1) Pull the hood release handle located on

the outboard side of the driver’s side ofthe instrument panel. This will disen-gage the engine hood lock halfway.

64MS126

2) Pull the under-hood release lever side-ways with your finger, as shown in theillustration. While pulling the lever, liftup the engine hood.

��$ �� !�� $�� $��!(�&��50��!)5&��$ �� '!��!�� ! �� &�� '��$�� $ �� $�� &�& �' ��'�&&�� &�& �')� '��&��&�� $�� $�� )

��

8�50�3�0��&�� "�� "��$�� $ �� )0�� $ �� "��'�&��)

NOTICE��&�� !��'&�� &�� "�$�� $ �! �� '�� !��'&�� )

��

?%1

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

64MS127

3) While holding the hood, pull the proprod out from the holding clip, then insertthe end of the rod into the designatedhole in the hood.

To close the engine hood:1) Lift the hood up slightly and remove the

prop rod from the hole. Put the prop rodback to the holding clip.

64MS128

2) Lower the hood to about 20 cm abovethe hood latch, then let it drop down.Make sure the hood is securely latchedafter closing.

8�50�3�� 0��!��!��"��

"��$�� $ �� )0�� $ �� "��'�&��)

� ��&�� $ �� &��) �$ �� !&�$$(�� "�� '�� "� �� )

� 0�� '�� ! �$$ �� &�� "��)��$��&)

��

�� &�� & $�� &�� "�$�� )�$� �&�� (� �� $�� ! ��+!�� ( �"& �� &�� )

��

8�50�3�0�� *��("�&��!�� $ ��!�� >& "�� &�� & ��& ��&�� !� ��$ ��&�� )

NOTICE��&&�� $��' �"� � '��'�� )

?%C

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

.��6�&��

77PH004

The sun visors can be pulled down to blockglare coming through the windshield, orthey can be unhooked and turned to theside to block glare coming through the sidewindow.

8��:�$�<��!!��-0�!��

67LH064

0�!�

64MS172

(1) Card holder(2) Mirror cover

You can put a card in the card holder (1) onthe back of the sun visor.

6�� '��:�$�<��!!��-

64MS076

(3) Vanity mirror(4) Vanity mirror light (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror (3) on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the mirror cover (1).The vanity mirror light (4) comes on whenthe mirror cover (1) is opened.

NOTICE��&�� &��("�&�� "� ��!��& ��!�� &�� &��'�� '��)

��

NOTICE��!�� &�� &�� (�� !��& �� & �� )0�� '��& �� ')

(1) ��

(2)

(1)��

�� ;�� &� ��'��

��&�� $ �� %��)

� �� &�� '��( �� '� � �� &� � � $�� "�� & � ) �$ �� $�� "�� & �� $�� (� �� )

NOTICE�$ �� '�� & �� ( �� '�� !��$�� '�( �� "� �� &%��)

(3)

(4)��

?%?

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��

64MS118

(1) Glove box light (if equipped)(2) Footwell lights (if equipped)(3) Instrument panel pocket light

(if equipped)

64MS078

(4) Front (without overhead console)(5) Front (with overhead console)(6) Center(7) Luggage compartment (if equipped)

�� +�� :�$�<��!!��-:,-Refer to “Glove Box” in this section.

B�� &:�$�<��!!��-:/-A footwell light is provided in the leg spacein front of each front seat. When any door(including the tailgate) is open, the footwelllights on both sides light automatically.NOTE:You can change the footwell lights opera-tion via the information display. Refer to“Information Display” in the “BEFOREDRIVING” section.

��& ��'�� :�$�<��!!��-:1-This light comes on while the positionlights, tail light and/or the headlights areon.

(1)

(2) (3) (2)

��

(4) / (5)

(6)

(7)

��

?%D

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B�� :�� &��-:C-

61MM0A205

Push the switch to turn on the light and push it again to turn off the light.

B�� :�� &��-:?-

64MS119

8�� :D-

61MM0A107

These light switches have three or fourpositions with function as described below:

3�:�-• The light comes on and stays on regard-

less of whether the door is open orclosed.

• To save the battery, the light will be auto-matically turned off when a period of 15minutes has elapsed after the light is on.

;33�:"-• The light comes on when the door is

opened. After closing all doors, the lightwill remain on for about 15 seconds andthen fade out. If you insert the key, orpress the engine switch to change theignition mode to ACC or ON during thistime, the light will start to fade out imme-diately. After removing the key from theignition switch, the light will turn on forabout 15 seconds and then fade out.

• Regardless of whether the door is openor closed, the light comes on 15 secondsand then fade out when the ignitionmode is changed to LOCK (OFF) or theignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”position.

3BB:�-The light remains off even when the door isopened..�30��70:�-When the light switch is in the DOOR orOFF position, push the switch to turn onthe light and push it again to turn off thelight.

��

(d) (c) (b) (a) (d)

(a)(b)(c)��

?%F

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��8�'!�� '�� :�$�<��!!��-:F-

61MM0B023

When you open the tailgate with the lug-gage compartment light switch in the ONposition (1), the light comes on andremains on as long as you keep the tail-gate open.When the luggage compartment lightswitch is in the OFF position (2), the lightremains off regardless of whether the tail-gate is open or close.

61MM0A108

NOTE:The number of doors involved in the light-ing operation of the interior light dependson the vehicle specification. If there is aswitch (rubber projection) at the dooropening as shown, the door is involved inthe lighting operation. The tailgate is alsoinvolved in this operation even without therubber projection.

��&&��.�� 8�� &��

64MS080

NOTICE;� �� !�� '!�� '�� &�� 3�!�&� �� $�� '�(�� "� ��&��)

(1)(2)

��

?%I

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��'!�� '�� :�$�<��!!��-

64MS147

The accessory socket will work when theignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion, or the ignition mode is “ACC” or “ON”.Each socket can be used to provide 12volt/120 watt/10 ampere power for electri-cal accessories when used alone. Makesure that the cap remains on the socketwhen the socket is not in use.

�&&�& ��!&:�$�<��!!��-

54G249

Assist grips are provided for convenience.

8�� 7��&:�$�<��!!��-

61MM0B025

You can hang clothing on the coat hooks.These hooks are not designed for large orheavy items.

NOTICE� 0� !�� $�&� $��' "��

"��( �� &�� &�� & � ��&�'� �'�(�� +�� '"�� !�� !�� $ ,/ �� E,/2�� E,2�'!��)

� 5&� �$ ��!!��!�� &&��& �� &� ��'�� >& �� &�& �')�� &�� &&��& ��&� �� &�� !�� & �!��$&�� )

��

NOTICE0� � �� '�� &&�& ��!�� '�� ( �� &&�& ��!)

��$�� &�<��!!�� &�� "��&( �� &��!� �'&�� )�� &( �� ' �� &�� )

?%J

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

�� +

64MS120

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.To close it, push the lid until it latchessecurely.

64MS148

The glove box light (if equipped) stays onwhile the lid is open.

3 ��8��&��:�$�<��!!��-

64MS121

Use this stowage to keep small articles.You can open the lid (1) by pressing theraised portion on it.

�� "�+ ��!��)� ��&��*��$��%�� &)

��EXAMPLE

(1)

��

?%,2

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

�� ;�� %

&��!��(�� && ��&��$��"��%��(�� $� ��&��) ��& ��&� �� $ ��!� ��&�'� �� %��&�'� �� $ ��&��)

� �$��!�� &�� &�� ( �� &�� &�� &��&� � ��$).�(��!��&�� &#H ;� �� &&�& ��

� ��&��)0�� '��& �� !��& ��&�&��$��'�&)

H ;� �� !�� $��''�"�� '&(&��&�� (�� &��) 0�� '�� &� �$��)

NOTICE� ;�� !!��$��

�� &�� ) ;�� &� ��"�� &��&��)

� ��&&�&��&��& ��%�� ' �� &��(�� &�&'��"��'��)

?%,,

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

8�!7��. ��

64MS081

(1) Instrument panel pocket (2) Front cup holders(3) Front bottle holder (4) Front armrest with console box (if equipped) (5) Front seat back pocket (6) Rear bottle holder(7) Rear armrest with cup holders

(if equipped)(8) Luggage compartment pocket

(1) (2) (3)

(3)

(5)

(5)

(4)(6)

(6)

(7) (8)

(8)

��

��& ��'�� :,-

B�� 8�!7��&:/-

��;�� !��"*�� &��'��$�� $��' �� !�� &'� ��)B�� !�� '��&�� "*�� $�� !��&��&��&&�$ �� )

��B�� !�� &��& ��"��&�!��&��*�� '��)� ��$��&��

��!��& ��!�� %�� <��) .!�� <%��&�"��*��)

� ;�� &� ��!��& ��&��!%��( ��( �� "��"��"*�� &)3"*�� &�� !��&'��"� ��"�� &��%�� & �! �� '!�� ( �� &�!��&��*��)

� � ��$�� &!�� <�� &�� $��'� ��&�� '� �� !�� $ �� &��$ �� (�� '!�� &) ��<%�� $��'� ��&'�� '%�� &�!�� &)

?%,/

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B�� 7��:1-E�� 7��:D-You should hold a bottle with a cap in theholder.

B�� '��& �� 8��&��+:�$�<��!!��-:C-

61MM0B029

The armrest can be slid forward.8��&��"�+Use this stowage for keeping small items.Open the compartment by raising the toplid while keeping the lever (1) up.

61MM0B030

NOTE:Always close the lid after you put somethinginto or take something out of the box.

�5�E5.&�� :�$�<��!!��-

64MS082

The AUX/USB socket is provided in theconsole box.Connect your portable digital music player,etc. to this socket to enjoy music throughthe vehicle’s audio system using it as asource. Refer to “Audio System” in thissection.

NOTICE0� � �� '�� '��& ( �� &� �� )

��

��(1)

(1)

NOTICE;�� !��"*�� & �� &��"�+��'��&!�� <��).!��$��<��5�E5.&�� &� ��'�� '��$�� $�5�E5.&�� )

��

?%,1

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B�� .�� :?-

64MS083

This pocket is provided for holding lightand soft things such as gloves, newspa-pers or magazines.

��'��& �� 8�!7��&:�$�<��!!��-:F-

64MS158

(1) Cup holdersThe rear armrest is stowed in the center ofthe seatback. Tilt it down forward to use.

��8�'!�� '�� :I-

61MM0B034

To open the lid, slide the lever (1) and pullthe lid.

8�50�3�;�� !� ��"��"��"*�� &�� !�� ) �$ �� &(�"*�� & &�� & "� ��&( ��&( � �)�� *�� !�� & �� &�� )

��

�� $ ��&�� "�� &�"& �� "��

!�� $ ��'��& ��$�& ��(� �� !�� !��% �� ) �$ �� $�& �� &�� "�� (��&�� '��& �&�� $�� "�� )

� �� &��& �!( �� &�� '��& �� $�� $��%��)�$ ��&��%$��%��& �� &�� !�&� ��( ��$��'��& ��*�� );�� & �� %$�� & �� &�� !�&� ��)

(1)

��

(1)

��

?%,C

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B�� & :�$�<��!!��-

58MST0509

Use the footrest (1) as a support for yourleft foot.

B�� &:�$�<��!!��-

64MS085

To prevent the driver’s side floor mat fromsliding forward and possibly interfering withthe operation of the pedals, MARUTI genu-ine floor mats are recommended. Whenever you put the driver’s side floormat back in the vehicle after it has beenremoved, be sure to hook the floor matgrommets to the fasteners and position thefloor mat properly in the footwell.When you replace the floor mats in yourvehicle with a different type such as all-weather floor mats, we highly recommendusing MARUTI genuine floor mats forproper fitting.

(1)

��

B�� $��!��% ��& '�� &�� >& &��$��'� �� $�� !��&��&��&&�$ �� )� ��&�� $��'� ��'%

'� &�� $�& ��&)� �� !�� $�� '� &

�� !�$ ��+�& ��$��'� )

?%,?

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��8�'!�� '�� 7��&.��!!��7��

64MS086

You can hang the shopping bag or othersuitable objects on the hook.This hook is not designed for large orheavy items.

��8�'!�� '�� 8� ��:�$�<��!!��-

64MS087

Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-gage compartment is hidden from view bya luggage compartment cover.

��8�'!�� '��

64MS088

Your vehicle is equipped with the luggagecompartment board in the luggage com-partment. You can place luggage or othercargos on the board or under the board.You can also place tall luggage by remov-ing the board from the luggage compart-ment.

NOTICE0� � �� "�� ( �� '& �� $�� ).��!!��#/��:C)C�"&-

��

��;�� '&�� !�$ ��%��'!�� '�� (� ��$ ��&'�� )3"*�� &�� !�$ �� "� �� "�� (��&�� *��(��"& �� >&�� )

��

��3"*�� & �� + �� '!�� '�� :�$�<��!!��- �� "& �� >&�� ( �� &� �� %�� )0��&��"*�� &��&�"��'��'��'�� );�� '& �� + �� '!�� '�� )

��

?%,D

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

61MM0B036

The luggage compartment board can beheld open as shown in the illustration.

��$��&��$��&:�$�<��!!��-��$��&

64MS139

��$��&

80J082

You can use the roof rails or the roof rack�anchors to attach the optional roof rack�which is available at your MARUTI�SUZUKI NEXA dealer� �� . If you use a roof� rack, observe the instructions and precau-tions in this section and provided with the�roof rack.• Make sure the roof rack is securely

installed.• Do not mount cargo directly on the roof

panel. The cargo can damage the roofpanel.

• The gross weight of the roof rack pluscargo must not exceed the loadingcapacity.– Roof rails: 40 kg (88 lbs)– Roof rack anchors: 40 kg (88 lbs)Also, do not let the gross vehicle weight(fully loaded vehicle including driver,passengers, cargo, roof load and trailer

8�50�3��$�� $�� "��( �� "��*��)

7�� "�� $��'� ��& �� )

NOTICE;� �� !!�� $�� "��&��!��(�� !�� "�� );�� &� �� "�� "�� )

��

��

?%,F

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

tongue weight) exceed the Gross Vehi-cle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in the@.��8�B�8�0�3�.A section of thismanual.

• Mount and secure the cargo onto theroof rack properly according to theinstructions provided. Be sure to stowthe heaviest items at the bottom and dis-tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.

• Do not carry items so large that theyhang over the bumpers or the sides ofthe vehicle, or block your view.

• Secure the front and rear ends of longitems – such as wood panels, surfboardsand so forth – to both the front and rearof the vehicle. You should protect thepainted surfaces of the vehicle fromscuffing caused by tie-down ropes.

• Check periodically to make sure the roofrack is securely installed and free fromdamage.

• For vehicles with roof rack anchors,make sure the anchors are covered withthe caps when not in use.

B��'�7��&MARUTI SUZUKI does not recommendyou use the frame hooks for towinganother vehicle. Your vehicle was originallydesigned to be towed on the road in caseof emergency towing. If your vehicle needsto be towed in an emergency, refer to“Towing” in @��84 .��6�8�Asection.

�� "��! '�� & �� $��

!��!�� &�� $��$$ �� &( ��&��!��&�� *��!��!�� '��)

� �� &�� "��! '�� &&��&*��"%"� & �� &(&��! ��&( $�& ��%�� &�� "��) 8��!�� '�� &�� &&��$�& ��)

� ��("��(��(��$�� '&��$$�� '��& �� "�� "� ��(�� &�� %�� !��&��*��);�� % ��&�� &�$�� &!�� & �!��$��)

��3"&�� $�� & �� &��&��$��'��&)0�� "��'��"��&�&��&��*��'��)� ;� �� &� �� $��'� ��& $��

�� )� � ��!��

�$ &� �� &��( '�� &�� &(&��& �� &�� '�� & �� &��+��&&� �& ��&&�� %��)

�� &�� &�( �� ''�� !��$�&&��&�� )

?%,I

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

B��

61MM0B038

The towing hook (1) is provided on thefront of the vehicle for use in emergencysituations only.To install the hook (1), follow the procedurebelow.

61MM0B039

1) Pick up the towing hook (1), jack handle(A) and wheel brace (B) stowed in theluggage compartment.

61MM0B040

2) Remove the cover on bumper (C) byusing a jack handle (A) covered with asoft cloth as shown in the illustration.

NOTE:Do not use excessive force as it may dam-age the cover strap.

61MM0B041

3) Install the towing hook (1) by hand.NOTE:We recommend to fasten the cover withtape to prevent damage during towing.

61MM0B042

(1)

��

(1)

(A)

(B)

��

(C)

(A)

��

(1)

��

(1)(B)

��

?%,J

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

4) To tighten the towing hook (1), turn itclockwise by using a wheel brace (B)until the hook (1) is securely installed.

To remove the towing hook (1), reverse theprocedure used to install the towing hook.

��

64MS140

The frame hook (2) is provided on the rearof the vehicle for use in emergency situa-tions and sea shipping purposes only.

3 ��7��&

64MS174

The hooks (3) are provided for trailer/trainshipping purposes only. The hooks (4) areprovided for sea shipping purpose only.

(2)

��

(3)

(4)

��

��;�� &� ��& :1-�� :C- $�� !��!�&�) 0��&� ��& '��"�� &� &��& ��*�� '��)

NOTICE0� !�� '�� (�� &� �� :,- $�� E �� &��!!�� &�� &��!%!��!��!�&�&)

?%/2

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��8�� .�& �'There are two types of heating and air conditioning systems as follows:• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System (Climate Control) (if equipped)

��3� ��

64MS159

1. Windshield defroster outlet2. Side defroster outlet3. Side outlet4. Center outlet5. Floor outlet

11

2

2

3

44

5

5

��

.��

60M0014

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally,to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.Move the dial (2) to open or close the out-let.

(1)(2)

CLOSE

OPEN

?%/,

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

8��

61MM0B047

Move the knob (1) vertically or horizontally to adjust the direction of airflow as desired.

(1) (1)

��7�� 8�� .�& �';�&��! ��$8�� &

61MM0A018

0�'!�� &�� :,-This is used to select the temperature byturning the selector.��&!��&�� :/-This is used to turn on the blower and toselect blower speed by turning the selec-tor.

�E8

2, / 1

C

(1) (4) (5) (3)

(2)

?%//

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��$��&�� :1-

61MM0A019

This is used to select one of the functionsdescribed below.6�� :�-

61M0100

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side air outlets.

�%�� :"-

61M0101

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and cooler air comes outof the center and side outlets. When thetemperature selector (1) is in the fullyCOLD position or fully HOT position, how-ever, the air from the floor outlets and theair from the center and side outlets will bethe same temperature.7�� :�-

61M0102

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets and the side outlets, alsocomes out of the windshield defroster out-

lets and also comes slightly out of the sidedefroster outlets.7�� N��$��& :�-

64MS036

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.;�$��& :�-

64MS090

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

?%/1

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

�� &�� :C-

61MM0A020

This selector is used to select the followingmodes.B��&��:$-When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will go off and outside air is circulatedinside the cabin.�� :�-When this mode is selected, the indicatorlight will come on, outside air is shut out andinside air is recirculated. This mode is suit-able when driving through dusty or pollutedair such as in a tunnel, or when attemptingto quickly cool down the interior.The "FRESH AIR" position (f) and RECIR-CULATED AIR air position (g) are switchedalternately each time the air intake selectoris pushed.NOTE:If you select the RECIRCULATED AIR posi-tion (g) for an extended period of time, theair in the vehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionally selectthe “FRESH AIR” position (f).

�� &�� :?-To turn on the air conditioning system, setthe blower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position and push in the airconditioning switch (5). With the air condi-tioning switch operation, a indicator light willcome on when the air conditioning systemis on. To turn off the air conditioning system,push the air conditioning switch again.During operation of the air conditioner, youmay notice slight changes in engine speed.These changes are normal, the system isdesigned so that the compressor turns onor off to maintain the desired temperature. Less operation of the compressor resultsin better fuel economy.

.�& �'3!�� & �� &�� Select the VENTILATION position (a) and“FRESH AIR” position (f), the temperatureselector to the desired temperature posi-tion, and turn off the blower. Fresh air willflow through the vehicle during driving.B�� The control settings are the same as fornatural ventilation except turning theblower speed selector to turn on theblower.��'�� :�&�� &��-Select the HEAT position (c) and “FRESHAIR” position (f), the temperature selectorto the desired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desiredblower speed position. Setting the blowerspeed selector to a higher blower speedposition increases heating efficiency.M�� :�&�� -The control settings are the same as fornormal heating except selecting theRECIRCULATED AIR air position (g). Ifyou use this heating method for anextended period of time, the air in the vehi-cle can become contaminated and the win-dows can become misty. Therefore, usethis method only for quick heating andchange to the normal heating method assoon as possible.

(f) (g)

?%/C

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

7��EB�� '�� Select the BI-LVEL position (b) and “FRESHAIR” position (f), the temperature selector tothe desired temperature position, and theblower speed selector to the desired blowerspeed position. Unless the temperatureselector is in the fully COLD position or fullyHOT position, the air that comes out of thecenter and side outlets will be cooler thanthe air that comes out of the floor outlets.��'��Set the air flow selector to the VENTILATIONposition (a), the temperature selector to thedesired temperature position and the blowerspeed selector to the desired blower speedposition, and push in the air conditioningswitch (5) to turn on the air conditioning sys-tem. Setting the blower speed selector to ahigher blower speed position increases cool-ing efficiency.You can switch the air intake selector toeither the “FRESH AIR” position (f) orRECIRCULATED AIR position (g) as youdesire. Choosing the RECIRCULATED AIRposition (g) increases cooling efficiency.

M��:�&�� -The control settings are the same as fornormal cooling except selecting the RECIR-CULATED AIR position (g) and the highestblower speed.NOTE:• If you select the recirculated air position

(g) for an extended period of time, the airin the vehicle can become contaminated.Therefore, you should occasionally selectthe “FRESH AIR” position (f).

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will cool fasterif you open the windows briefly while youoperate the air conditioner with the airintake selector at the “FRESH AIR” posi-tion (f) and the blower at high speed.

;��'��$��Set the air flow selector to a desired air flowselector position, the temperature selectorto the desired temperature position and theblower speed selector to the desired blowerspeed position. Also select the “FRESHAIR” position (f) and push in the air condi-tioning switch (5) to turn on the air condi-tioning system.NOTE:Because the air conditioner dehumidifiesthe air, turning it on will help keep the win-dows clear, even when blowing heated airusing the DEFROST position (e) or HEAT &DEFROST position (d).

64MS091

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• select the DEFROST position (e) and

“FRESH AIR” position (f),• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,

��

?%/?

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

• adjust the temperature selector to theHOT end,

• push in the air conditioning switch (5) toturn on the air conditioning system, and

• adjust the side outlets so the air blowson the side windows.

�� If you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engine idling.This circulates the refrigerant and oil andhelps protect the internal components.If your air conditioner is equipped with airfilters, clean or replace them as specifiedin the “Maintenance Schedule” in the“��.��80�3� ��; ��0��8�Asection. NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

NOTICE5&�� $�� '��'�� &�&% �')5&��%,1C��);�� '�+��!�� %,1C�� $��%�� &)

?%/D

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

�� '� ��7�� 8�� .�& �':8��'� �8�� -:�$�<��!!��-;�&��! ��$8�� &

64MS050

(1) Temperature selector(2) Blower speed selector(3) Air intake selector(4) “MODE” switch(5) Defrost switch(6) Air conditioning switch(7) “OFF” switch(8) “AUTO” switch(9) Display

3BB

�503

�E8�3;�

B�3�0 ��

(1)

(4)

(9)

(8)

(2)

(7)(6)(3) (5)

��

0�'!�� &�� :,-

64MS051

Turn the temperature selector to adjust thetemperature. The display (9) shows theselected temperature.

NOTE:If you turn the temperature selector (1)until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,the climate control system will operate atmaximum heating or cooling. The tempera-ture of the air from the outlets may changesuddenly while “LO” or “HI” is displayed,but this is normal.

NOTE:When you change the units of temperaturein the information display, the automaticheating and air conditioning system tem-perature display units will be changedautomatically. Refer to “Information Dis-play” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sectionfor details.

(1)

?%/F

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

��&!��&�� :/-

64MS052

The blower speed selector (2) is used toturn on the blower and to select blowerspeed.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, theblower speed will vary automatically as theclimate control system maintains theselected temperature.�� &�� :1-

64MS053

Push the air intake selector (3) to changebetween the following modes.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airintake will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.NOTE:When you select the recirculated air mode,the automatic operation system is deacti-vated if you push the “AUTO” switch (8).��8��85��0�;��:�-When this mode is selected, outside air isshut off and inside air is recirculated. Thismode is suitable when driving through anarea with polluted air such as a tunnel, orwhen attempting to quickly cool down thevehicle.B��.7��:"-When this mode is selected, outside air isintroduced.The “FRESH AIR” position (b) and RECIR-CULATED AIR position (a) are selectedalternately each time the air intake selectoris pushed.NOTE:If you select the RECIRCULATED AIRposition (a) for an extended period of time,the air in the vehicle can become contami-nated. Therefore, you should occasionallyselect the “FRESH AIR” position (b).

@�3;�A&�� :C-

64MS054

Push the “MODE” switch (4) to changeamong the following functions. The indica-tion of the selected mode appears on thedisplay.If the “AUTO” switch (8) is pushed, the airflow will vary automatically as the climatecontrol system maintains the selected tem-perature.

6�� :�-

61M0100

(2)

(b)

(a)(3)

�3;�

(4)

(c)

(d)

(e)

( f )

?%/I

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe center and side outlets.�%�� :�-

61M0101

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor, center and side outlets.7�� :�-

61M0102

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, also comes out of thewindshield defroster outlets and alsocomes slightly out of the side defroster out-lets and the side outlets.

7�� N��$��& :$-

61M0103

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe floor outlets, the windshield defrosteroutlets, the side defroster outlets and theside outlets.;�$��& &�� :?-

64MS038

Push the defrost switch (5) to turn on thedefroster.

;�$��&

61M0106

Temperature-controlled air comes out ofthe windshield defroster outlets, the sidedefroster outlets and the side outlets.NOTE:When you push the defrost switch (5), thefresh air position (b) will be automaticallyselected and the air conditioning switch willautomatically turn on (“A/C” will appear onthe display). In cold weather, air flows out ofthe defroster outlets but the air conditioningdoes not turn on even though the A/C indi-cator comes on as well as the defrost indi-cator.

(5)

FRONT

?%/J

307��83�0�3�.��;�M5��0

�� &�� :D-

64MS055

The air conditioning switch (6) is used toturn on and off the air conditioning systemonly when the blower is on. To turn on theair conditioning system, push in the switch;“A/C” will appear on the display and theindicator on the switch will come on. To turnoff the air conditioning system, push in theswitch again; “A/C” and the indicator will gooff.You can use the air conditioning switch (6)to manually turn the air conditioner on or offaccording to your preference. When youturn the air conditioning switch off, the cli-mate control system cannot lower theinside temperature below outside tempera-ture.

.�& �'3!�� & �� &�� '� ��!��

64MS056

You can let the climate control systemwork automatically. To set the system forfully-automatic operation, follow the proce-dure below.1) Start the engine.2) Push the “AUTO” switch (8).3) Set the desired temperature by turning

the temperature selector (1).The blower speed, air intake and air floware controlled automatically to maintain theset temperature. However, the air flow isnot changed to the defrost position auto-matically.To turn the climate control system off, pushthe “OFF” switch (7).

NOTE:If the “AUTO” on the display blinks, there is�a problem in the heating system and/or air�conditioning system. You should have the�system inspected by an �� .NOTE:• To find the temperature at which you are

most comfortable, start with the 25°C(75°F) setting, for example.

• If you turn the temperature selector (1)until “HI” or “LO” appears on the display,the climate control system will operate atmaximum heating or cooling.

• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weatheror hot air in hot weather, the system willdelay turning on the blower until warmedor chilled air is available.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sunwith the windows closed, it will coolfaster if you open the windows briefly.

• Even under automatic operation, youcan set individual selectors to the man-ual mode. The manually selected func-tions are maintained, and the otherfunctions remain under automatic opera-tion.

• If the windshield and/or the front doorwindows are fogged, push the defrostswitch (5) to turn on the defroster, orpush the “MODE” switch (4) to changethe air flow to the heat & defrost position(f) to defog the windows.

A/C(6)

��

(8)

(7)

��

��

��

��

• To return the blower speed selector (2),air intake selector (3), and “MODE”switch (4) to automatic operation, pushthe “AUTO” switch (8).

64MS149

Be careful not to cover the interior tem-perature sensor (10) located between thesteering wheel and the climate controlpanel, or the solar sensor (11) located atthe top of the central part of the dash-board. These sensors are used by theautomatic system to regulate temperature.�� !��You can manually control the climate con-trol system. Set the selectors to thedesired positions.

64MS091

NOTE:If you need maximum defrosting:• push the defrost switch (5) to turn on the

defroster (the air conditioning system willcome on and the fresh air position (b)will be selected automatically),

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,• adjust the temperature selector to the

“HI” indication on the display, and• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

��!� ��"�If you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.If your air conditioner is equipped with airfilters, clean or replace them as specifiedin the “Maintenance Schedule” in the#�� $section.NOTE:Your vehicle uses the air conditioningrefrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around1993 for automotive applications. Otherrefrigerants are available, including recy-cled R-12, but only R-134a should be usedin your vehicle.

(11)

(10)

%��

%��

NOTICE�&!�'� (�� )��'� ��*�!'�� +�,-�+�'�� ,�� !�� "��-! !��!�'� &,& �+.��&��/0��,.�� +!1��"�� (�� /0�� )! (� � (�� *�!'�� &.

�/

��

��-!��

63J055

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turnit clockwise firmly by hand.

��& �� !��*��-!��2��",��&+! ��&We recommend that you always ask a�� about frequency band, max output power, antenna� position at vehicle and specific conditions� for installation and/or use before installing� a radio transmitter in your vehicle. Such� equipments may cause the electronic con-trol system to malfunction if they are incor-rectly installed or they are not suited for the�vehicle.

NOTICE�� 3�!-� -�+�'�� (�� -!�� 45 ��+�3�� (�� )(��&!�'��

�� +� !"�"��)�&(.5 ��+�3�� (�� )(�� (�

�� (! &� ��, (!�'� &�"(� �&� ��)� "�!�!�'� !�� 6!�'� '��'�� !�'��"��"�3��3��,��3�(!"��.

%��

NOTICE�+��!�& �� !��*��+�7!��"�+�+��!"� !��2�!�+�� &�"(��&�"�� (��&8�� 9�� :�! !;��<&�� 9��-��-!�&��,�� (��)!��&&�� &�+! ��&�+�,�"��&��" ��!"�!� ��*��"�� )! (�� ,�� 3�(!"��<&��!'�! !��&,& �+8��&�� !�'��!��3�(!"��*��+��"��7��+&.��&�� ,�� 2��!*!�-� &��3!"�� -3!"�.

�=

��

��-!��,& �+�:!*��2�!��->

��%

��?��@ � 64MS186

%��

�

��

��*� ,�!�*��+� !�� &��!&"&��"�� !��&• When the inside of the vehicle is very

cold and the player is used soon afterswitching on the heater, condensationmay form on the disc or the opticalparts of the player and proper playbackmay not be possible. If condensationforms on the disc, wipe it off with a softcloth. If condensation forms on the opti-cal parts of the player, do not use theplayer for about one hour. This willallow the condensation to disappearnormally.

• Driving on extremely bumpy roadswhich cause severe vibrations maycause track to skip.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism.Even in the event that trouble arises,never open the case, disassemble theunit, or lubricate the rotating parts.Please bring the unit to an authorized��

�� !��&��-�!�'

This unit has been designed specifically forplayback of compact discs bearing mark(A) shown above.

A��B�*�,��,��1 ��-�-�� !�� !�'� (��-!��&,& �+��3!�)!�'� (��-!�� &,& �+� -!&��,� )(!�� -�!3!�'8��""!-�� "��""��.��*�,��&� � (�&��-�3��+�� -8�! �"��-��3�� ,�� *��+� 7�!�'� �)�� *� ��-��-� ��**!"�"��-! !��&.5 C�� ,�� ,�&� �� (�� -� ��-

,��+!�-�� (��-�!3�.��3�!-��,!�'��1 ��-�-�� !�� !�' (�� -!�� &,& �+� �� 3!�)!�'� (��-!��&,& �+�-!&��,.

5 ��+!�!��!;��,��&��*�)! (� (��-!�&,& �+� "�� &� ��-� �� !�� * (��-!��&,& �+�7�*��-�!3!�'.

5 ��&� � ,�� *�3��! �� -!�� & � !��&7�*�� -�!3!�'� &�� (� � ,�� "��2�!"6�,� �� (�+��&!�'� (��&� &.

5 �� (�� &��-� 3��+�� 3�� (� �)!��)�,�� "�� !�� 7��)��*��-��-� ��**!"�"��-! !��&)(!��-�!3!�'.

(A)

�0

��

�� (��-!&"&�"��7��,

To remove the compact disc from its stor-age case, press down on the center of thecase and lift the disc out, holding it care-fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by theedges.Never touch the surface.

To remove fingermarks and dust, use asoft cloth, and wipe in a straight line fromthe center of the compact disc to the cir-cumference.

New discs may have some roughnessaround the edges. The unit may not workor the sound may skip if such discs areused. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to

remove the roughness (C) from the edgesof the disc before inserting it into the unit.

Never stick labels on the surface of thecompact disc or write on the surface with apencil or pen.

Do not use any solvents such as commer-cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,or thinner to clean compact discs.

Removing the disc Proper way to holdthe compact disc

(B)(B)(C)

��

��

Do not use compact discs that have largescratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc. Use of such discs will cause damage orprevent the system from operating prop-erly.

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-light or any heat source.

NOTE: • Do not use commercially available CD

protection sheets or discs equipped withstabilizers, etc.These may get caught in the internalmechanism and damage the disc.

• It may not be possible to play CD-Rdiscs with this unit due to the recordingconditions.

• CD-RW discs cannot be played with thisunit.

®��:�*��2�!��->The Bluetooth® word mark and logo areregistered trademarks and are owned bythe Bluetooth SIG, Ink.

� �� &!�'� (!&� ��! � ��-� �� 9�� (D

��-,�-�3!"��)(��3��2��& �-.This unit shares the communication fre-quency with other private or public wirelesscommunication equipment such as a wire-less LAN and other wireless communica-tion radios.You should stop using this unit wheneveryou are notified that your unit disturbsother wireless communication immediately.

9�� (D��!"�:/>�:!*��2�!��->

A��B�(!&�!&��"��&&��&��-�" .��&��*"�� &� �� -E�& +�� &� �� *��+��"�� *� ��"�-��&� � (�� (�� (�&�� &��"!*!�-� (��!�� +�,� ��&�� !�(�;��-��&��-!� !��1��&��.

�� "�3��&� ��-� -�� +� � ��!�� (!&��! �7,�,��&��*.��*��2��!*!�-��&��*��&��3!"!�'.

(1)

�F

��

9�&!"�� !��&

64MS187

(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) MUTE button

��%

(2) (1)

(3)

��!�'��)��?�**Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).The unit starts in the function mode it wasin when the power was turned off last.�-E�& !�'� (��3��+�Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).Turning it clockwise increases the volume;turning it counterclockwise decreases thevolume.NOTE:While driving, adjust the volume to anextent that sound and/or noise comingfrom outside the vehicle can be heard.

%��

�G

��

�� Press the MUTE button (3) to mute thesound. To cancel the mute, press theMUTE button (3) again.�-E�& !�'�7�&&? ��7��?7��"��?*�-��1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2).Each time the knob is pressed, soundadjustment will change as follows:

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to adjust the sound.

�-E�& !�'� (�� H�� :�� 3��+�� "�� >The Auto Volume Control (AVC) functionautomatically adjusts (increases/decreases) the sound volume in accor-dance with vehicle speed. The AVC controlis provided with three selectable levels(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volumeadjustment increases together with theLEVEL number.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2) until the AVC adjust-ment mode is selected.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select the desiredAVC adjustment level. (Initial setting:LEVEL 2)

��&� �Preset-EQ calls up various sound types inaccordance with the listening music type.1) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSH

SOUND knob (2) several times until“PRESET-EQ” appears.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2).Each time the knob is turned, presetEQ mode will change as follows:

Preset-EQ : ��>

Bass adjustment :9��>

Treble adjustment :�� 9� ��>

Balance adjustment :9�� >

Fader adjustment :�� >

AVC adjustment :�H�� H ��=>

OFF (FLAT)

JAZZ

ROCK

POP

CLASSIC

HIP-HOP

�I

��

�!& ��!�'� �� (��-!�

64MS188

��%

(5)

(4) (3) (6)

(7)

(2)(1)

�!&��,

(1) FM button(2) AM button(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(6) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(7) AST button

(A) Band(B) Frequency

(A)

(B)

%��

�J

��

��" !�'� (��7��-Press the FM button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the recep-tion band will change as follows:

��" !�'� (��7��-Press the AM button (2).

��6� ��!�'Press the seek Up button (3) or the seekDown button (4).The unit stops searching for a station at afrequency where a broadcast station isavailable.

�� !�'Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (5).The frequency being received is displayed.��&� �+�+��,1) Select the desired station.2) Hold down a desired button ([1] to [6])

of the Preset buttons (6) to which youwant to store the station for 2 secondsor longer.

�� & ��Hold down the AST button (7) for 2 sec-onds or longer.Six stations in good reception will automat-ically be stored to the Preset buttons (6) inorder, starting from a station whose fre-quency is the lowest.

NOTE:• Auto store can be released by pressing

AST button (7) while auto store is underway.

• When the auto store is performed, thestation previously stored in the memoryat the position is overwritten.

• When there are fewer than 6 stationsthat can be stored even if 1 round ofauto store operation is performed, nostation will be stored at the remainingPreset buttons (6).

• 6 stations can be preset for FM1 andFM2 in common, and 6 stations for AMin auto store mode.

�� & ��+�-��?�**Press the AST button (7).Each time the button is pressed, the modeis switched as follows:

��-!��"�� !��Radio reception can be affected by envi-ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radiosignal’s power and distance from the sta-tion. Nearby mountains and buildings mayinterfere or deflect radio reception, causingpoor reception. Poor reception or radiostatic can also be caused by electric cur-rent from overhead wires or high voltagepower lines.

FM1 FM2

AST mode on AST mode off

�0�

��

�!& ��!�'� ��

64MS189

��%

(5) (4)

(2) (1)

(3)

(6)

(7)(8)

�!&��,

(1) Insertion slot(2) Eject button(3) CD button(4) Up button(5) Down button(6) RPT button(7) RDM button(8) DISP button

(A) Track number(B) Play timeNOTE:This product does not support 8 cm CD(sometimes called as “mini single CD”, “3-inch CD”, “CD3”, etc.).

(B)

(A) %��

�0/

��

• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)cannot be used.

• Some discs recorded in CD-R/CD-RWformat may sometimes be impossibleto use.

• A CD is to be inserted with its label sideup.

• When there is a CD already in the unit,it is impossible to insert another CDwithout ejecting the CD in the unit. Donot use force to insert a CD into the CDinsertion slot.

��" !�'��+�-�Press the CD button (3).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

��-!�'��Insert a CD in the Insertion slot (1).When a CD is loaded, play starts.

E�" !�'��Press the Eject button (2).When the ignition mode is LOCK (OFF) orthe ignition switch is in the “LOCK” posi-tion, the CD remained ejected for around15 seconds or longer will automatically bedrawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-tion)The backup eject function:This function allows you to eject a CD bypressing the Eject button (2) even whenthe ignition mode is “LOCK” (OFF) or theignition switch is in the “LOCK” position.

�!& ��!�'� ��When a CD is inserted, playback will auto-matically start.When a CD is already inside the unit,press the CD button (3) to start playback.

(A)

NOTICE5 ��3�� !�&�� ,�� *!�'�� (��-

!� �� (�� !�&�� !�� &�� .� ��3��!�&�� *��!'��7E�" &.

5 ��3��!�&�� )! (�'��"�+!�'�� *��+� �-(�&!3�� 7��)! (�� "�� !�-!"� !�' (� � �-(�&!3�� 7��(�&�7�� +�3�-.��(!&�+�,"��&�� (�� E�" ��&�� !��+��*��" !��.

CD

Bluetooth® audio (if equipped)

AUX (if equipped)

NOTICE�*� ,�� *��"�*��,� �,� �� &(� ��E�" �-��!�&!-�� (��! �7�*�� -!�'8� (��-!&"�&��*�"�� +!'( �7�&"�� "(�-.A(��-!�'��8��+�3��! �*��+ (��! �"�+�� ,�7�*��-!�'.

�0=

��

��" !�'�� "6• Press the Up button (4) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (5) twice to lis-

ten to the previous track.When the Down button (5) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.

��& �*��)��-!�'?��)!�-!�'�� "6• Hold down the Up button (4) to fast for-

ward the track.• Hold down the Down button (5) to fast

rewind the track.

��-�+��,7�"6Press the RDM button (7).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.

�� ,7�"6Press the RPT button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• TRACK REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

�!&��,�"(��'�Press the DISP button (8).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

NOTE:• “NO TITLE” will be displayed when there

is no text information in the disc currentlybeing played.

• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(8) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.

OFF TRACK RANDOM

OFF TRACK REPEAT

Play time

Disc title

Track title

�0

��

�!& ��!�'� ��?A��?��!&"

64MS190

��%

(3) (2)

(4)

(1)

(5)(6)

�!&��,

(1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(2) Up button(3) Down button(4) RPT button(5) RDM button(6) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) DISC type

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

%��

�00

��

��" !�'��*��-��Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select a folder.

��" !�'�� "6• Press the Up button (2) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (3) twice to lis-

ten to the previous track.When the Down button (3) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.



rewind the track.


• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “F.RDM” willlight.The tracks in the current folder will beplayed in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the loaded disc will beplayed in random order.


• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.All tracks in the currently selectedfolder will be played repeatedly.

OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM

OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

�0�

��




• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(6) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.

�� &��?A��?��A(� �!&��K• MP3 (MPEG audio layer3) is an audio

compression format that has becomethe standard format among PC users. Itsmerit is that the original audio data iscompressed to approximately 1/10 andhigh sound quality is maintained. Thismeans that it is possible to store the dataof approximately 10 music CDs on a sin-gle CD-R/RW disc, which in turn makesit possible to play music for a long timewithout having to change the disc.

A(� �!&�A��K• An abbreviation of “Windows Media

Audio,” WMA is an audio compressionformat developed by Microsoft.

• WMA files for which the DRM (DigitalRights Management) function is ON can-not be played.

• Windows MediaTM and the Windows®

logo are trademarks or registered trade-marks of Microsoft Corporation in theUnited States and other countries.

A(� �!&��K• An abbreviation of “Advanced Audio

Coding,” AAC is an audio compressionformat used by MPEG2 and MPEG4.

��!� &� ��+�+7��)(��+�6!�'��?A��?��*!��&Common• High bit rate and high sampling fre-

quency are recommended for high qual-ity sounds.

• Selecting VBR (Variable Bit Rate) is notrecommended. Selecting VBR maycause display of incorrect playing timeand jumpiness of playback.

• Playback sound quality varies depend-ing on the encoding environment. Fordetails, refer to the user manual of theencoding software and the writing soft-ware in use.

Play time

Folder name

File name

Album name (MP3, AAC only)

Track title

Artist name NOTICE��3��&&!'�� (��#.+�$8�#.)+�$8��#.+0�$�*!��+��1 ��&!�� *!��!*! �!&�� !�� (��?A��?��*��+� *!��.��!�� 7&��3�� (!&�+�,��&�� !�� -�+�'�� (�� &��6�� -�� !&��-�" !��.

�0F

��

��"��-!�'��?A��?��*!��&��+�-!�• It is recommended not to write both CD-

DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files on adisc.

• If both CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AACfiles are on the same disc, tracks may notbe played in the correct order or sometracks may not be played at all.

• When storing both MP3 data and WMAdata on the same disc, sort and placethem in different folders.

• Do not write files other than MP3/WMA/AAC files and unnecessary folders on adisc.

• MP3/WMA/AAC files should be named tomeet the standards and the file systemspecifications as shown below.

• The file extension “.mp3”, “.wma” or“.m4a” should be assigned to files basedon their format independently.

• You may encounter a trouble in playingMP3/WMA/AAC files or displaying infor-mation of MP3/WMA/AAC files depend-ing on the writing software or CD recorderin use.

• This unit does not have a play list func-tion.

• It is recommended to write discs in Disc-at-Once mode even though Multi-ses-sion mode is supported.

��+��&&!��*��+� &MP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbpsMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbpsMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps

• Sampling frequency:MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHzMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHzMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz

WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: CBR 32 k - 320 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are

not supported.AAC*• Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* Apple Lossless is not supported.�� -�*!��&,& �+&ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, Romeo��1!+�+��+7��*�*!��&?*��-��&• Maximum number of files: 512

(files + folders)• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8• Maximum number of folders: 255

(Root folder is included.)

�0G

��

�!& ��!�'� ��*!��&�& ��-�!��9�-�3!"��:!*��2�!��->

64MS191

��%

(4) (3) (1)

(5)

(2)

(6)(7)

�!&��,

(1) USB button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button

(A) Folder number(B) Track number(C) Play time(D) File type

NOTICE�� "��" ��,��9�-�3!"�� (�� (��9�+�+��,��9��-!��,��.�� "��" �+�� !��9-�3!"�&� �� (��9�"��" ��&!�'��9� (�78� � ".� ��,!�'� ��)�� +�� !�� 9� -�3!"�&� *��+� (�� "��" �� "��-� "��&�� 3��(�� !�'� ��-&+�6!�'.

(C)

(B)(A)

(D)

%��

�0I

��

��" !�'��9�-�3!"��+�-�Press the USB button (1).��" !�'��*��-��Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select the desired folder.��" !�'�� "6• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the

next track.• Press the Down button (4) twice to listen

to the previous track.When the Down button (4) is pressedonce, the track currently being playedwill start from the beginning again.



rewind the track.��-�+��,7�"6Press the RDM button (6).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

• FOLDER RANDOMThe random indicator “F.RDM” will light.The tracks in the currently selectedfolder will be played in random order.

• ALL RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the connected USB devicewill be played in random order.


• FILE REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEATThe repeat indicator “F.RPT” will light.All the tracks in the folder currentlyselected will be played repeatedly.




• If text data contains more than 12 char-acters, the “>” mark will appear at theright end. Holding down the DISP button(7) for 1 second or longer can display thenext page.OFF FOLDER RANDOM ALL RANDOM

OFF FILE REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

Play time

Folder name

File name


Track title

Artist name

�0J

��

�� &��9�-�3!"��+�� !7��9�-�3!"�&• USB Mass Storage Class

For details as to whether your USBmemory/USB Audio is compatible withUSB Mass Storage Class, please con-tact the USB memory/USB Audio manu-facturer.

• USB Standard Compatibility 1.1/2.0 FullSpeed

• File System FAT12/16/32, VFAT• Maximum current less than 1.0 A• If devices such as USB hub, extension

cable are connected to the audio sys-tem, it may not be recognized. In suchcase connect the USB device directly tothe audio system.

• Devices such as MP3 player/Mobilephone/digital camera may not be recog-nized by the audio system for playingmusic.

��9�-�3!"��"��" !��• When connecting a USB device, make

sure that the connector is pushed all theway into the port.

• Do not leave the USB device for longperiods of time in places inside the vehi-cle where the temperature can rise toohigh.

• Back up any important data beforehand.We cannot accept responsibility for anylost data.

• It is recommended not to connect a USBdevice that contains data files other thanMP3/WMA/AAC format.

��"��-!�'� ��?A��?�� *!��&� �� 9�-�3!"�• Playback or display may not be possible

depending on the type of USB device inuse or the condition of the recording.

• Depending on the connected USB mem-ory, the files may be played in differentorder from the order that the files werestored.

��+��&&!��*��+� &MP3• Bit rate:

MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k - 320 kbpsMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbpsMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k - 160 kbps

• Sampling frequency:MPEG1 Audio Layer III: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHzMPEG2 Audio Layer III: 16 k/22.05 k/24 kHzMPEG2.5 Audio Layer III: 8 k/11.025 k/12 kHz

WMA (Ver. 7, Ver. 8, Ver. 9*)• Bit rate: CBR 32 k -320 kbps• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* WMA 9 Professional/LossLess/Voice are

not supported.AAC*• Bit rate: ABR 16k - 320 kbbs• Sampling frequency: 32 k/44.1 k/48 kHz* Apple Lossless is not supported.��1!+�+��+7��*�*!��&?*��-��&• Maximum number of files: 2500

(files + folders)• Maximum number of files in a folder: 255• Maximum depth of tree structure: 8• Maximum number of folders: 255

(Root folder is included.)

��

��

�!& ��!�'� ��!��-D�:!*��2�!��->

64MS192

��%

(4) (3) (1)

(5)

(2)

(6)(7)

(8)

�!&��,

(1) USB button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) RPT button(6) RDM button(7) DISP button(8) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])

(A) Track title(B) Track number(C) Play time

(C)

(A)

(B)

%��

��/

��

��" !�'��!��-D�+�-�Press the USB button (1).��" !�'�� "6• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the





rewind the track.


• SONG RANDOMThe random indicator “RDM” will light.The tracks in the iPod® will be played inrandom order.

• ALBUM RANDOMThe random indicator “F.RDM” will light.The albums in the iPod® will be played inrandom order.


• SONG REPEATThe repeat indicator “RPT” will light.The track currently being played will beplayed repeatedly.


OFF SONG RANDOM ALBUM RANDOM OFF SONG REPEAT

Playlist name /Track title (Playlist mode only)

Artist name /Track title

Album name /Track title

Track title /Play time

��=

��

NOTE:If text data contains more than 12 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Holding down the DISP button (7) for1 second or longer can display the nextpage.��,!�'��-��&��" !��1) Press the button numbered [6] of the

Preset buttons (8) for 1 second or lon-ger.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2).Each time the knob is turned, the modewill change as follows:

3) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select the desiredmode.

NOTE:• When the button numbered [6] of the

Preset buttons (8) is pressed, the previ-ous mode will be displayed.

�� &��!��-D�� -�!��-D

• iPod® touch (5th generation)• iPod® touch (4th generation)• iPod® touch (3rd generation)• iPod® touch (2nd generation)• iPod® touch (1st generation)• iPod® classic• iPod® nano (7th generation)• iPod® nano (6th generation)• iPod® nano (5th generation)• iPod® nano (4th generation)• iPod® nano (3rd generation)• iPod® nano (2nd generation)• iPod® nano (1st generation)• iPod® (5th generation)• iPod® (6th generation)• iPod® (6thPlus generation)• iPhone® 6 / 6 plus• iPhone® 5• iPhone® 4S• iPhone® 4• iPhone® 3GS• iPhone® 3G• iPhone®

* Some functions may not be availabledepending on the model of iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-tered in the U.S. and other countries.

* iPhone® is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other coun-tries.

* Apple is not responsible for the opera-tion of this device or its compliance withsafety and regulatory standards.

!��-D�"��" !��• Make sure to detach the iPod® after

pressing the engine switch to change theignition mode to “LOCK” (OFF) or theignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”position. The iPod® may not be shutdown when it is being connected andmay result in battery depletion.

• Please do not connect iPod® accesso-ries such as an iPod® remote control orheadphones while connecting the iPod®

with the unit. The unit may not operatecorrectly.

PLAYLIST

ARTIST

ALBUM

SONGS

GENRE

��

��

��%��" !��

64MS193

(1) CD button

��%

(1)

��%�"��" !��To listen to auxiliary audio sources (soldseparately) through the unit, follow theinstruction below.1) Connect the auxiliary audio source to

the AUX/USB socket (separatelyattached) with an AUX cable.

2) Press the CD button (1).Each time the button is pressed, themode will change as follows:

��5 9�*�� "��" !��8� +� �� (�� ! 8

��-� ��&�� 6�� (�� 3��+�� *� (��1!�!��,� ��-!�� &��"�� )! (!�� '�� (� �)!�� "��&��-!& �� !��.

5 A(�� (�� -!�� &��"�� !&� ��-�**8��!&��+�,�7��+! �-.�9��&�� **� (�� ! � �� &)! "(� �� (��+�-��7�*�� !�'��**� (��-!��&��"�.

CD


AUX (if equipped)

%��

��0

��

NOTE:• Please consult your place of purchase

for details about whether a given auxil-iary audio source can be connected andthe proper auxiliary cord to use.

• The volume and tone controls of theauxiliary audio source can be adjustedon the unit.

• In AUX mode, the volume setting is dif-ferent from another mode.

��

��

9�� (D��-&��:!*��2�!��->

64MS194

(1) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(2) VOL PUSH POWER knob(3) Preset buttons

(1) (2)

AUX

(3)

� ��!�'�&)! "(

(4) Bluetooth® setup button(5) Off Hook button(6) On Hook button(7) VOL switch

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

%��

%��

%��

��F

��

�(��'!& �� !��

NOTE:• Up to 5 phones can be registered.• To set up a new phone, disconnect the

audio player from the unit. Connect theaudio player again after phone setup iscompleted if necessary.

• When failed to establish the pairingwithin 120 seconds, the connectingoperation will be canceled. Please tryagain or refer to the manual of the phonein use for how to establish the pairingwith the phone.

1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (1) to select “Pairing”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.

4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the phone and establishthe pairing.Refer to the manual of the phone in usefor further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the phone. (For phones with Blue-tooth® version 2.1 or above passkeyinput is not required.)

6) Press the On Hook button (6).NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• When additionally registering a phone,

operate the same step from 1).��"�!3!�'��"��Press the Off Hook button (5) to receive acall. �-!�'��"��Press the On Hook button (6) to end a call.��E�" !�'� �� "�� :��,� *�� &�� -+�-��&>Press the On Hook button (6) to reject aincoming call.

�-E�& !�'� (��!& ��!�'�3��+�• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)

during a call.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

�-E�& !�'� (��!�'�3��+�• Turn the VOL PUSH POWER knob (2)

while a call coming in.Turning it clockwise increases the vol-ume; turning it counterclockwisedecreases the volume.

• Press the VOL switch (7) during a call.Pressing “+” of the switch increases thevolume, pressing “-” of the switchdecreases the volume.

�-E�& !�'� (��"��!�' ��3��+�Follow the instructions below to adjust thecall or ringtone volume.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).

The Bluetooth® setup menu will be dis-played.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Tele-phone”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set-ting”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

To use the hands-free function with thisunit, it is required to register the phonein advance.

��G

��

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call Vol-ume” or “Ringtone Volume”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection.The current call or ringtone volume willbe displayed.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select desired callor ringtone volume, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��" !�'� (��!�' ��Follow the instructions below to select aringtone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Sound Set-ting”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Ringtone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.The current ringtone will be sounded.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select desired ring-

tone, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.�!��!�'��&!�'��!&&�-?��"�+!�'?�� '�!�'��&Follow the instructions below to dial to thelast dialed number again.NOTE:Up to 10 phone numbers of the latest callscan be stored. (10 each for dialed,received and missed call)1) Press the Off Hook button (5).

The Bluetooth® phonebook menu willbe displayed.

2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “MissedCalls”, “Incoming Calls” or “OutgoingCalls”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.To dial from the dialed history or thereceived history, select “Missed Calls”,“Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing Calls”respectively.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select the desirednumber, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, andpress the knob (1) or the Off Hook but-ton (5) to dial to the selected number.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back”, the previous

menu will be displayed.• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting “Add

Speed Dial” can register the selectednumber in the speed dial.

• Pressing “Confirm” after selecting“Delete” can delete the selected numberfrom the call history.

�� !��*�"��(!& ��,Follow the instructions below to delete amissed/incoming/outgoing call history.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SetupPhonebook”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete His-tory”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “MissedCalls”, “Incoming Calls”, or “OutgoingCalls”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number tobe deleted or “ALL”, and press the knob(1) to determine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?” or

��I

��

“Delete All?”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete thedeletion.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��'!& �� !��!��(��7��6Registration of numbers in the phonebook.Follow the instructions below to registerphone numbers in the Phonebook of theunit.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).




4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Add Con-tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “OverwriteAll” or “Add One Contact”, and pressthe knob (1) to determine the selection. The “Rest of Memory XXXX: Ok?” willbe displayed.

6) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDERPUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con-firm”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

7) Transfer contacts from the phone.When the registration is completed, the“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.

NOTE:• When selecting “Go Back” the previous

menu will be displayed.• Up to 1000 numbers can be registered in

Phonebook.��&*��*�"��(!& ��,�:��!& ��,>Follow the instructions below to transfercall history of the registered phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call His-tory”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Call His-tory?”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to transfer thecall history from the phone.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��6!�'��"��7,��(��7��6Follow the instructions below to dial a num-ber registered in Phonebook.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Phone-book”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select the initial ofthe name you would like to make a call,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.The registered numbers will be dis-played in sequence. If names havebeen registered together with numbers,the names will be displayed.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Dial”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Press the Off Hook button (5).The displayed number or the numberregistered with the displayed name willbe dialed.

�� !�� *� ��'!& ��-� -� �� :�� ,>Follow the instructions below to delete anumber registered in Phonebook.

��J

��




4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete Con-tacts”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number tobe deleted, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete?”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.


NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��'!& �� !��!��&��-�-!��Follow the instructions below to assign anumber to one of the Preset buttons to useas the speed dial.




4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Add SpeedDial”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number tobe assigned, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “ChoosePreset”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

7) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the selected number is to beassigned. If a number is alreadyassigned to the selected button, a con-firmation message will be displayed.Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to complete theassignment.When the assignment is completed, the“Setup Phonebook” will be displayed.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.�� "(�"��:��-�-!��>Follow the instructions below to dial thenumber assigned to each of the Presetbuttons (3).1) Press the Off Hook button (5).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SpeedDials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3).When no number is assigned, “NoEntry” is displayed.

4) Press the Off Hook button (5).The selected number will be dialed.

�� !��*�&��-�-!��:��-��!��>To delete a number assigned for the speeddial, follow the instructions below.1) Press the Off Hook button (5).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “SpeedDials”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Press one of the Preset buttons (3) towhich the number to be deleted isassigned. “No Entry” appears if the number is notregistered.

�F�

��

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Delete”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Del SpeedDial”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.


NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.�!&��,��*�-�3!"��-� ��:��3!"��+�>Follow the instructions below to display theBD (Bluetooth® Device) address anddevice name.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BluetoothInfo”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “DeviceName” or “Device Address”, and pressthe knob (1) to display the device nameor the BD (Bluetooth® Device) address.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��&� � �� (��*�" ��,�-�*�� &Follow the instructions below to reset allthe settings to the factory defaults.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Initialize”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “All Initial-ize”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to start thereset.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��" !��*��(��:��" ��(��>Follow the instructions below to select aphone to be paired with from the registeredphones.



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a phone tobe paired with, and press the knob (1)to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Select”, andpress the knob (1) to determine theselection.


menu will be displayed.• The Bluetooth® ready audio device will

be disconnected when the phone isselected.

�!& ��*��(��&�:�!& ��(��&>Follow the instructions below to display thenames of the registered phones insequence.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Setup Blue-

�F/

��

tooth”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.The names of the registered phonesare displayed in sequence.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��&&6�,�&� !�'�:�� &&6�,>Follow the instructions below to set thesecurity number (Passkey).1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Passkey”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “New Pass-key”, and press the knob (1) to deter-mine the selection.

5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDERPUSH SOUND knob (1) to select “Con-firm”.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a number forthe first digit, and press the knob (1) to

determine the selection. Select anddetermine numbers for the second,third and fourth digits in order in thesame manner. When not entering up tothe eighth digit, enter blanks for thesuccessive digits.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to determine thepasskey setting.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.�� !�� *� �(�� !�*��+� !�� :�� (��>Follow the instructions below to delete theregistered information of the phone.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “List Phone”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select a phone tobe deleted, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “DeletePhone”, and press the knob (1) todetermine the selection.


7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

�F=

��

9��*��" !��?�**�:9��)��>Follow the instructions below to turn on/offthe Bluetooth® function.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (4).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BT Power”,and press the knob (1) to determine theselection.

4) Press the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (1) to select “BT PowerOn” or “BT Power Off”.

NOTE:• When the BT function is turned off, the

connection between this unit and theregistered phone in use will be discon-nected.

• When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.

�F

��

9�� (D��-!��:!*��2�!��->

64MS195

��%

(4) (3) (1)

(2)

(5)

� ��!�'�&)! "(

�!&��,

(1) CD button(2) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob(3) Up button(4) Down button(5) DISP button(6) Bluetooth® setup button(A) Track number(B) Play time

(6)

(B)

(A)

%�� %��

�F0

��

��'!& �� !��*��-!��-�3!"�&

NOTE:• To set up a new audio player, disconnect

the phone from the unit. Connect thephone after audio player setup is com-pleted if necessary.

• When failed to establish the connectionwithin 120 seconds, the connectingoperation will be canceled. Please tryagain or refer to the audio player manualfor assistance with the pairing process.



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Pairing”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Select “CAR AUDIO” from the Blue-tooth® menu of the audio player andestablish the pairing.Refer to the manual of the audio playerin use for further information.

5) Enter the Passkey displayed on the unitto the audio player.


menu will be displayed.• When additionally registering audio

devices, operate the same step from 1).��" !�'� (��9�� (D��-!��+�-�Press the CD button (1).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

��" !�'� �� '�� :��,� *�� &�� -+�-��&>Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select a group.��" !�'�� "6• Press the Up button (3) to listen to the





rewind the track.NOTE:Some functions may not be availabledepending on Bluetooth® audio.�!&��,�"(��'�Press the DISP button (5).Each time the button is pressed, displaywill change as follows:

To use Bluetooth® ready audio deviceswith this unit, it is required to register thedevices.

CD


AUX (if equipped)

Play time

Track name

Artist name

Album name

�F�

��

NOTE:If text data contains more than 12 charac-ters, the “>” mark will appear at the rightend. Holding down the DISP button (5) for1 second or longer can display the nextpage.��" !��*��-!��-�3!"��:��" ��-!�>Follow the instructions below to select anaudio device to be paired with from theregistered audio devices.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select an audiodevice to be used, and press the knob(2) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Select”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”,and press the knob (2) to complete thepairing.


menu will be displayed.

• The phone will be disconnected when theBluetooth® ready audio device isselected.

�!& ��*��-!��-�3!"�&�:�!& ��-!�>Follow the instructions below to display thenames of the registered audio devices insequence.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection. The names of registeredaudio devices will be displayed insequence.

NOTE:When selecting “Go Back”, the previousmenu will be displayed.��&&6�,�&� !�'�:�� &&6�,>Follow the instructions below to set thesecurity number (Passkey).1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).


2) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “Setup Bluetooth”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “Passkey”, and pressthe knob (2) to determine the selection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select “New Passkey”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.

5) Press or turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Confirm”.

6) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to select a number for the firstdigit, and press the knob (2) to deter-mine the selection. Select and deter-mine numbers for the second, third andfourth digits in order in the same man-ner. When not entering up to the eighthdigit, enter blanks for the successive dig-its.

7) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUNDknob (2) to determine the passkey set-ting.


�FF

��

�� !�� *� ��-!�� -�3!"�� !�*��+� !��:�� -!�>Follow the instructions below to delete theregistered information of audio device.1) Press the Bluetooth® setup button (6).



3) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “List Audio”,and press the knob (2) to determine theselection.

4) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select an audiodevice to be deleted, and press theknob (2) to determine the selection.

5) Turn the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (2) to select “Delete”, andpress the knob (2) to determine theselection.




�!&"��!+��*��9�� (D�*��" !��• Depending on the mobile phone models,

some phones may not be compatiblefully or partially (some function may berestricted).

• Connectivity or voice quality may getaffected depending on circumstances.

• After the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the audio system takesfew seconds to detect and connect tothe Bluetooth® device (if already paired)

• Make sure that you are aware of allapplicable lock laws and accordingly useBluetoothD device.

��+� ��-!�� &:!*��2�!��->Controlling of basic functions of the audiosystem is available using the switches onthe steering wheel.

�-E�& !�'� (��3��+�• To increase the volume, hold down “+” of

the VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being increased until the switch isreleased.

• To decrease the volume, hold down “-” ofthe VOL switch (1). The volume will keepon being decreased until the switch isreleased.

• To mute the sound, press the switch (2).��" !�'� (��+�-�Press the switch (3).Each time the button is pressed, the modewill change as follows:

(2) (3)

(1) (4)

�FG

��

It is possible to turn on the audio systemby pressing the switch (3).

��" !�'� (�� -!�� & � !�� :��/8� ��=8��+�-�>• To select the next preset station, press

“ ” of the switch (4) only for a moment.• To select the previous preset station,

press “ ” of the switch (4) only for amoment.

• To scan a higher frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

• To scan a lower frequency radio station,press “ ” of the switch (4) for 1 secondor longer.

��" !�'� (�� "6� :��8� ��9� :!��-D>89�� (D��-!��+�-�>• To skip to the next track, press “ ” of the

switch (4) only for a moment.• To skip to the previous track, press “ ” of

the switch (4) twice only for a moment.When the switch (4) is pushed downonce only for a moment, the track cur-rently being played will start from thebeginning again.

��& �*��)��-!�'?��)!�-!�'�� "6• To fast forward, press “ ” of the switch

(4) for 1 second or longer.• To fast rewind, press “ ” of the switch (4)

for 1 second or longer.

FM1 (Radio)

FM2 (Radio)

CD


AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®) (if equipped)

AM (Radio)

<

<

<

<<

<

<

<

�FI

��

�� !�(�* ��

64MS196

��%

(4)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(1) VOL PUSH POWER knob(2) Preset buttons ([1] to [6])(3) Up button(4) TUNE FOLDER PUSH SOUND knob

%��

�FJ

��

The anti-theft function is intended to dis-courage thefts, such as that the audio sys-tem becomes inoperable when it is installedon other vehicles.This function works by entering a PersonalIdentification Number (PIN).When the unit is disconnected from itspower source, such as when the audio sys-tem is removed or the battery is discon-nected, the unit will become inoperable untilthe PIN is reentered.

�� !�'� (�� !�(�* ��" !��1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1)

to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) andpress the VOL PUSH POWER knob (1).“SECURITY” will be displayed.

3) Press the Up button (3) and the buttonnumbered [1] of the Preset buttons (2)simultaneously.

4) Enter a 4-digit number to be registeredas PIN using the buttons numbered [1] -[4] of the Preset buttons (2).

5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or longerto set the anti-theft function.

NOTE:Take a note of the registered PIN and keepit for the future use.

��"��!�'� (�� ! (�* �*�� To cancel the anti-theft function, delete theregistered PIN.1) Press the VOL PUSH POWER knob

(1) to power off.2) Hold down the buttons numbered [1]

and [6] of the Preset buttons (2) andpress the VOL PUSH POWER knob(1).“PIN ENTRY” will be displayed.



5) Hold down the TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or lon-ger to delete the registered PIN. Theindication “----” will be displayed andthe anti-theft function will be canceled.

NOTE:To change your PIN, first delete your cur-rent PIN, then set a new one.

��*!�+!�'� (�� &�� -�� !*!"� !��+7��:��>When the main power source is discon-nected such as when the battery isreplaced, etc, it is required to enter the PINto make the unit operable again.1) Set the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position.“SECURITY” will be displayed.



4) Hold down TUNE FOLDER PUSHSOUND knob (4) for 1 second or lon-ger.When the PIN same as registered isentered, the power of the audio systemwill be turned off automatically and itwill become operable again.

NOTE:If an incorrect PIN is entered, “ERROR”and the total number of incorrect entryattempts will be displayed.If an incorrect PIN is entered 10 times ormore, “HELP” will be displayed and theaudio system will become inoperable.

�G�

��

9� ��,��& �� !��Install a lithium battery (CR2025) with the poles facing the correct direction.

9� ��,��"�+�� !+!�'• When battery power is depleted, the button may not be operable. If the remote controller

does not operate, replace the battery and check the operation.�� !��7� ��,• Be sure to follow the instructions to prevent battery leakage, over-heating, ignition or

explosion.

If battery leakage has occurred, wipe thecontainer first then install a new battery. Ifthe battery solution contacts the skin, washoff with water completely.�� !��+� �� • Do not leave the remote controller in an

area exposed to direct sunlight, such ason the dashboard or steering wheel. Theremote controller may deform because ofthe heat, (Be especially careful of thedashboard exposed to direct sunlight inthe summer, as it will become extremelyhot).

A��B5 �� 1��&�� (��7� ��,� ��*��+�.

�� &(�� "!�"�! 8� -!&�&&�+7��8��(�� (��7� ��,.

5 �� "(��'�� (��7� ��,.5 �&�� (��&��"!*!�-� ,��7� ��,.5 C�� (�� 7� ��&(��-� 7� ��,

�)�,�*��+�"(!�-�� 3�� ""!-�� &)��)!�'.

�*� (��7� ��,�!&�&)��)�-8�"�� " ��-�" ��!++�-!� ��,.

��5 ��& �� (�� 7� ��,� )! (� (�� &

*�"!�'� (��"��" �-!��" !��.5 A(�� !�� &�� *�� '��!�-

�*� !+�8� �� !*� (�� 7� ��,� !&� -��-8��+�3�� (��7� ��,�*��+� (��+� �"�� .

%��

�G/

��

• When the vehicle is parked in an areaexposed to direct sunlight, Ensure theremote controller is placed in an area notexposed to direct sunlight. For example:Glove box.Under direct sunlight, signal receptionfrom the remote controller weakens. Ifthis happens, hold the remote controllerclose to the signal receptor on the frontpanel.

�G=

��

��+� �� :!*��2�!��->��++�� !��&

In Sound ModePress to adjust the sound.(bass/treble/balance/fader)In Preset-EQ ModeThe Preset-EQ setting switches as follows:

In AVC ModeThe AVC setting switches as follows:

�� ?��A��7� ��

OFF (FLAT)

JAZZ

ROCK

POP

CLASSIC

HIP-HOP

OFF

LEVEL 1

LEVEL 2

LEVEL 3

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

Power ON / OFF��A ��7� ��

(including at AUX mode)

H�� 7� ��

�� 7� ��Press to mute the sound. Press it again to cancelthe mute.

follows (including at AUX mode, except while�displaying iPod® menu):

��7� ��

Preset-EQ

BASS

TREBLE

BALANCE

FADER

AVC

The mode switches asfollows:

�� 7� ��

FM1

FM2

CD


AUX (if equipped)

USB (iPod®)(if equipped)

AM

Press to adjust volume.

While playback, the sound mode switches as�

�G

��

��-!�� !��&

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

NOTE:When there are fewer than 6 stations that can be stored even if 1 round of auto store operation is performed, no station will bestored at the remaining preset buttons.

Press to return to the last received frequency

Press it for 2 seconds or longer. It selects thestations with the stronger signals and storesthem in order.

��7� ��

Press to select the radio station.� C��C��?��A��7� ��

Press to select the desired preset station.�� 7� ��&�:/F>

in the previous auto store mode.

�G0

��

�� !��&

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

Press to play the current track randomly.Press it again to cancel.

��:�>�7� ��

Press to plays the current track repeatedly.Press it again to cancel.

��:0>�7� ��

Press to skip to the next/previous track.Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-rewind the track.

� C��C��?��A��7� ��

��:F>�7� ��The display switches as follows:

Press it for 1 second or longer to display thenext page.

Play time

Disc title

Track title

�G�

��

��?A��?��!&"�� !��&

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

The random mode switches as follows:��:�>�7� ��

OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

The repeat mode switches as follows:��:0>�7� ��

OFF

FILE REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

Press to skip to the next/previous folder.�� ?��A��7� ��

��:F>�7� ��The display switches as follows:

Artist name

page.

Play time

Folder name

File name


Track title

Press to skip to the next/previous track.Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward

rewind the track.

� C��C��?��A��7� ��

Press it for 1 second or longer to display the

�GF

��

��9�� !��&

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

Press to skip to the next/previous file.Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-rewind the file.

� C��C��?��A��7� ��

The repeat mode switches as follows:��:0>�7� ��

OFF

FILE REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

The display switches as follows:

Press it for 1 second or longer to display the nextpage.

��:F>�7� ��

Play time

Folder name

File name


Track title

Artist name

Press to skip to the next/previous folder.�� ?��A��7� ��


OFF

FOLDER RANDOM

ALL RANDOM

�GG

��

!��-D�� !��&

/TUNEVOL - VOL +FLD

/TUNE

MODE AS SOUND

1

54

FLD

ENTSEEKTRACK

SEEKTRACK

RPT RDM 6

MENU 32

DISP

While displaying iPod® menu, press to select thedesired item and display the list. When a track isselected from the list, the playback starts.

��7� ��


OFF

SONG RANDOM

ALBUM RANDOM

Press to play the current track repeatedly.Press it again to cancel.

��:0>�7� ��

The display switches as follows:

Press it for 1 second or longer to display the nextpage.

��:F>�7� ��

Playlist name / Track title (Playlist mode only)

Artist name / Track title

Album name / Track title

Track title / Play time

During playback• Press to display iPod® menu.• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

While iPod® menu is displayed• Press to display the folder in one layer upper.• Press it for 1 second or longer to display the top menu.

� ��7� ��

While displaying iPod® menu, press to displaythe next/previous list in the same layer.

�� ?��A��7� ��

Press to skip to the next/previous file.Press it for 1 second or longer to fast-forward/fast-rewind the file.

� C��C��?��A��7� ��

�GI

��

��7��&(�� !�'When encountered a problem, check and follow the instructions as described below.If the described suggestions do not solve the problem, it is recommended to take the unit to your ��

��7��+ ��&&!7��"��&� ��&&!7��&�� !��

��++��

Unable to operate The security function is on.

When “SECURITY” is displayed, enter�the ID.When “HELP” is displayed, contact your��

Unable to turn on the power (no sound).(No sound is produced) Fuse is blown. Contact your ��

��

��-!�

Much noise It may not be exactly tuned in to the sta-tion. Tune it in exactly to the station.

Unable to receive by auto tuning There may be no station emitting signalspowerful enough. Pick up a station by manual tuning.

��

Sound skips or noise producedThe disc is dirty. Wipe the disc with a soft cloth.

The disc has a major scratch or iswarped.

Replace the disc with the one with noscratch and also not warped.

�GJ

��

��?A��?��

No playback The disc contains unsupported formatteddata. Check the file format.

Sound skips or noise produced Sound skipping may occur when playingVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files. It is not recommended to play VBR files.

��9

Playback does not start when the USBdevice is connected.

There is no supported format file to playon this unit. Check the file format.

The current consumption of the USBdevice exceeds 1.0 A.

Use an USB device with a current con-sumption lower than 1.0 A.

9�� (D

Pairing failed

The distance between this unit and theBluetooth® ready device is too far, or ametallic object may be located betweenthe Bluetooth® ready device and this unit.

Change the location of the Bluetooth®

ready device.

The Bluetooth® function of the Blue-tooth® ready device is off.

Refer to the manual of the Bluetooth®

ready device. (Some devices have thepower saving function that automaticallyactivates after a certain time.)

Unable to receive a call. Your current location may be out of ser-vice area.

Drive your vehicle to the service area ofthe phone.

The voice quality of hands-free is low(Distortion, noise etc.).

Another wireless device may be locatednear the unit.

Switch off the wireless device or keep itaway from the unit.

��7��+ ��&&!7��"��&� ��&&!7��&�� !��

�I�

��

��!&��,��&&�'�&

�!&��, ��&&!7��"��&� ��&&!7��&�� !��

��

��/ The disc cannot be read.

Insert the disc with its label side up.Check the disc if�it is�not�warped or is free�of�flaws.�When�ERROR 1�does�not disappear even�when a normal�disc�is inserted, contact your ��

�� The player developed an error of anunidentified cause.

When�the�CD�is�in the unit, press the CD eject button to��remove the disc.When�the disc cannot�be ejected,�contact your��

��9?!��-D

��/ The USB device is disconnected. Check the connection of the USB device.

��= Impossible to communicate correctly withthe USB device.

Unplug the USB device and plug it again.Check the USB device.

�� Inoperable due to an unidentified cause. Unplug the�USB�device and�plug�it again.When ERROR�3 does not disappear, contact your ��

��0 The current consumption of the USBdevice exceeds 1.0 A. Check the USB device.

�I/

��

9�� (D

��/ The player developed an error of anunidentified cause.

Disconnect the Bluetooth® ready device� and connect� it��again.When ERROR�1 does not disappear, contact your ��

��!��- Failed to establish pairing Try to establish the pairing again.

��+��,�� Reached the limit for the number of con-nected device information

Delete information of unnecessary devices and try toestablish the pairing again.

�� 3�!�. Inoperable during driving Operate the system after pulling over your vehicle.

�� !�6�- Phone is disconnected Try to establish the pairing again.

�!&��, ��&&!7��"��&� ��&&!7��&�� !��

H �� B��A��B

F

H �� B��A��BH�(!"��-!�'�................................................................... F/��!��)!�'�...................................................................... F/

F/

H �� B��A��B

H �� B��A��B

H�(!"��-!�'Your vehicle was designed for specificweight capacities. The weight capacities ofyour vehicle are indicated by the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and thePermissible maximum Axle Weight (PAW,front and rear). The GVWR and PAW (frontand rear) are listed in the “SPECIFICA-TIONS” section.GVWR – Maximum permissible overallweight of the fully loaded vehicle (includingall the occupants, accessories and cargoplus the trailer nose weight if towing atrailer).PAW – (Front and Rear) Maximum permis-sible weight on an individual axle.Actual weight of the loaded vehicle andactual loads at the front and rear axles canonly be determined by weighing the vehi-cle. Compare these weights to the GVWRand PAW (front and rear). If the gross vehi-cle weight or the load on either axleexceeds these ratings, you must removeenough weight to bring the load down tothe rated capacity.

��!��)!�'A��B

��3�� 3��-� ,�� 3�(!"��.� �(�'��&&� 3�(!"�� )�!'( � :&�+� �*� (�)�!'( &� �*� (�� 3�(!"��8� �� (�� ""�� &8��""�&&��!�&8�"��'��&� ��!��&��)�!'( � !*� �)!�'�� !��>�+�& ��3�� 1"��-� (�� B��&&� H�(!"��A�!'( � �� !�'� :BHA�>.� �� --! !��8��3�� -!& �!7� �� -� &�� (� � (�)�!'( ��! (�� (��*�� 1��1"��-&� (�� +!&&!7�� +�1!+�+�1��A�!'( �:��A>.

A��B��)�,&� -!& �!7� �� "��'�� 3��,.� ��3�!-� ��&�� !�E��,� �� -�+�'�� ,��3�(!"��8��)�,&�&�"��"��'�� 3�� ! � *��+�&(!* !�'�!*� (��3�(!"��+�3�&� &�--��,.� ��"�� (��3!��7E�" &� �� (�� *�� -� �&� *�� *��)��-� !�� (�� "��'�� &� ��&&!7��.��3��!��"��'��(!'(�� (�� (�� *� (��&�� 7�"6&.

�� !#$%��#&#'%� �� $�� =��

��

�� !� ��"��"(�-�� ....................................................... G=��!�-!"��!� ��"��"(�-�� ........................................ G=��!3��9�� ............................................................................. GF �'!��!��-��!� �� ........................................................... GF �'!�� .................................................................... GJ�!�� ........................................................................... G//B��!�� ................................................................................ G//�� "(��-�� ........................................................................ G/��!� �� ............................................................................. G/9��6�&� .................................................................................. G/� ��!�'�................................................................................ G/��!��&�...................................................................................... G/F9� ��,�.................................................................................. G/I��&�&�.................................................................................... G=��-�!'( ��!+!�'�................................................................. G=09��7��"�+�� ............................................................... G=0A!��9��-�&� ....................................................................... G0A!�-&(!��-�A�&(��!-� ................................................... GG�!��-! !��!�'��,& �+� .................................................... GI

7

G/

��

60A187S

A��B@�� &(��-� �6�� 1 ��+�� "�� )(��)��6!�'� �� ,�� 3�(!"�� 3�� ""!-�� !�E��,.��*�)��"�� !��&� (� � ,�� &(��-� 7�� &��"!��,�"��*�� 7&��3�45 �� 3�� -�+�'�� !� ��-�-

�" !3� !��*� (��!��7�'�&,& �+�7�&�� (�� 7� ��,� !&� -!&"��" �-��-� (��!'�! !��&)! "(�(�&�7��!� (��#��C$��&! !��*�� & �J�&�"��-&� 7�*�� *��+!�'� ��,��" �!"�� &��3!"�� )��6� �� ,�� L�C�.� �� "(� �!�7�'�&,& �+�"�+�� &8��)!��&.�(��)!��&��)��-�)! (�,��) ��,��)� �7!�'8��-� (��"��&��,��)�*��&,�!-�� !*!"� !��.

5 �� 3�� (��'!��!�'�!�'��'�&�� (��"��*!��-��&.

(Continued)

A��B(Continued)5 A(�� (�� '!�� !&� ��!�'8� 6��

(��-&8� "�� (!�'8� ��&8� ��-� � (��7E�" &��)�,�*��+� (��*��-�-�!3�7�� .� 3�� (��'(� (�� *��+�,�� 7�� +�3!�'8� ! � "�� +� !"��, ��)! (�� )��!�'.

5 A(��! � !&��"�&&��,� ��-��&��3!"�)��6�)! (� (��'!��!�'8�+�6�&�� (� � (�� 6!�'� 7��6�� !&� &� *��,��-� (�� &�1��!&�!�� .

5 �� "(�!'�! !��)!��&�� (��!'�! !�� &,& �+� �� &� )(�� & �� !�'� (��'!��)(�� (��'!��!&��!�'8��,��"��-��"�!3��" �!"�&(�"6.

5 9�� "��*�� "(� �� (� ��'!��8� �1(��& � +��!*��-� ��-�!��&8� +�**��8� ��-!� �� -� )� ��(�&�&.

5 �� )� &+�6!�'8� &��6&8� ��*��+�&� ��-� *�� (�� 7� ��,.��++�7��*�+�&��&�� .

5 �� '� ��-��,��3�(!"��!*�! �!&&�� -� ��,� )! (� (�� 7��(�"6��3!-�-�!��,��3�(!"��.

5 9�� "��*�� "��&�� ""!-�� &(�� "!�"�! &�7� )�� (��&! !3��-��'� !3��7� ��,� ��+!��&.

5 C�� &�-� �!�8� "�� 8� ��-� � (��*��!-&��)�,�*��+�"(!�-��-�� &8�!&��&�� *� �&�-� *��!-&� ��,M��3�� (�+� �� (�� '��-8!� ��&�)��&8�� ".

7-2

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule Periodic Maintenance Schedule“A” :Adjust“C”: Clean“R”: Replace or Change“I”: Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or

replace as necessary“L”: Lubricate“T”: Tighten to Specified Torque “O”: Rotate

NOTE:This table includes services as scheduledup to 80,000 km mileage. Beyond 80,000km, carry out the same services at thesame intervals respectively.

WARNING

NOTICEWhenever it becomes necessary toreplace parts on your vehicle, it isrecommended that you use MARUTIgenuine replacement parts or theirequivalent.

The following table shows the times whenyou should perform regular maintenanceon your vehicle. This table shows in

�� !!�� !��"��#��$��$��%��!��%"��

7-3


Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer readingor months, whichever comes first.

FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COSTkm (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Engine1-1 l l l R l R l R l R

1-2 - - R R R R R R R R

1-3 l l l l l l l l l l

1-

1-

Engine Coolant (Level, Leakage)

Engine oil and engine oil

Cooling system hoses and connections (Leakage and Damage)

Engine Mounting and anifold ixing

Exhaust System (Noise, Leakage etc. - l - l - I - I - l

1- Exhaust Gas Recirculation Valve D13A engine - - - - C - - C - -FUEL2-1. Air cleaner filter element Paved-road Clean ,000 KM. Replace after every 40,000 KM.

Dusty Condition Clean after 2,500 KM or as required. Replace after every 40,000 KM.Replace more frequently if dust condition is severe.

2-2. Fuel tank cap, fuel lines and connections (Leakage and Damage) - l - - - l - - - l

2-3. Fuel Filter and Water Draining I l I R I R I R I R

CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION3-1. Clutch fluid (level, leakage) l l l R l R l R l R

3-2. Clutch slipping (Dragging or Excess Damage) l l l l l l l l l l

3-3. Manual Transmission/Transfer or Differential Oil (Level, Leakage) Replace at 1,60,000 km or 10 years whichever comes first

I I I I I I I I I I

DRIVE SHAFT4-1. Drive shaft boot (boot damage) - l l l l l l l l l

BRAKE5-1. Brake Fluid (Level, Leakage) I I I R I R I R I R

5-2. Brake pedal (pedal - wall clearance) I I I I I I I I I I

5-3. Parking brake lever and cable (Play, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

5-4. Brake disc and pad (Wear) – I I I I I I I I I

7-4



FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

5-5. - - I I I I I I I I

5-6.

Brake drum and shoes (Wear)

I I I I I I I I I I

5-7. I I I I I I I I

WHEEL6-1. Tyres (air pressure, abnormal wear, crack and rotation) I I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O I&O

6-2. Wheels (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

6-3. Front/Rear wheel bearing (Loose, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

FRONT / REAR SUSPENSION7-1. Suspension strut (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-2. Suspension arms / Knuckle support (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

7-3. Rear spring (Damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-4. Shock absorbers (Oil leakage, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

7-5. All bolts and nuts (Loose) – T T T T T T T T T

7-6. Torsion rods – I I I I I I I I I

STEERING

8-1. Steering wheel (Play, loose) I I I I I I I I I I

8-2. Steering column and tie rods (Loose, damage, wear) I I I I I I I I I I

ELECTRICAL9-1. Battery electrolyte (Level, leakage) I I I I I I I I I I

9-2. Wiring harness connection (Loose, damage) – I I I I I I I I I

9-3. Lighting system (Operation, stains, damage) I I I I I I I I I I

9-4. Horn (Operation) I I I I I I I I I I

9-5. System Voltage I I I I I I I I I

BODY10-1. All chassis bolts and nuts (Tighten) – I T T T T T T T T

10-2. All latches, hinges and locks (Function)) I I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L I&L

7-5



FREE INSPECTION PERIODIC MAINTENANCE AT COST

km (x1000) 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

months 1 6 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

ROAD TEST11-1. Operation of Brakes, gear shifting and speedometer I I I I I I I I I I

11-2. Body and chassis noise I I I I I I I I I I

AIR CONDITIONER12-1. Check belt tension I I I I I I I I I I

12-2. Tighten compressor mounting bolt – T T T T T T T T T

12-3. All hose joint (Check, tighten) I I I I I I I I I I

12-4. Check fun ctioning of flap I I I I I I I I I I

12-5. Clean condenser with low pressure water – C C C C C C C C C

12-6. Check belt for frayed edges I I I I I I I I I I

12-7. Check all mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I

12-8. Air conditioner filter element I I I I R I I R I I

GF

��

��!3��9��

$�� =�� =�� >�� $��=��@��\��

%��\��=�� =��

�'!��!��-��!� ��"!*!�-��!��/��!�&�� '!��-��Be sure that the engine oil you use comes�under the quality classification of ACEA�A5/B5. SAE �A� is the best choice for good fueleconomy, and good starting in coldweather.��/F��!�&�� '!��-��Be sure that the engine oil you use comesunder the quality classification of ACEAC2.SAE �A� is the best choice for good fueleconomy, and good starting in coldweather.

A��BA(�� (�� '!�� !&� ��!�'8� 6��(��-&8�(�!�8�"�� (!�'8� ��&8�� ".��)�,*��+� (��+�3!�'�*��-�-�!3��7�� &.

NOTICE

GG

��

�!��3��(�"6

84E012

(1) MIN(2) MAX(3) Engine oil dipstick

It is important to keep the engine oil at thecorrect level for proper lubrication of yourvehicle’s engine. Check the oil level withthe vehicle on a level surface. The oil levelindication may be inaccurate if the vehicleis on a slope. The oil level should bechecked either before starting the engineor at least 5 minutes after stopping theengine.The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-ored yellow for easy identification. Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with aclean cloth, insert the dipstick all the wayinto the engine, then remove it again. Theoil on the stick should be between theupper and lower limits shown on the stick.If the oil level indication is near the lower

limit, add enough oil to raise the level tothe upper limit.

��*!��!�'

81A147

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowlythrough the filler hole to bring the oil level tothe upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful notto overfill. Too much oil is almost as bad astoo little oil. After refilling, start the engineand allow it to idle for about a minute. Stopthe engine, wait about 5 minutes and checkthe oil level again.

(2) (1)

(3)NOTICE

��!�� "(�"6� (��!��3��'��,"��-� ��-� ��&��!��&��'!�� 7��-�� !�&�**!"!�� !�.

NOTICE�� (��!��3�� (��%��!+! .��+�"(��!��"��&�&��&��!��&��'!�� 7��.

CloseOpen

%��

GI

��

�(��'!�'� �'!��!��-��!� ��Drain the engine oil while the engine is stillwarm.

64MS151

(1) Engine oil filler cap (D13A engine)(2) Engine oil filler cap (D16AA engine)

1) Remove the oil filler cap.2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug

and drain out the engine oil.

60G306

�!'( ��!�'� ��2��*��-��!��'�=��+�:=.��6'+8�/0.I��7* >

4) Reinstall the drain plug �� gasket.� Tighten the plug with awrench to the� specified torque.

��"�� (��!��!� ��/��!�&�� '!��-��NOTE:Since special procedures and tools are�required, it is recommended that you trust�this job to your �� .1) Using a socket or a ring spanner

remove oil filter housing cover (3).

61M7001

(1) Loosen(2) Tighten

2) Remove the old oil filter element andreplace it with a new oil filter element.

3) Clean the surface of oil filter cap andreplace the O-ring.

4) Tighten the oil filter housing cover onthe oil filter housing using a socket orring spanner to the specified torque.

��(�� '!�� !�� +�� +�,� 7�(!'(� ��'(� �� 7�� ,�� *!�'��&)(�� (��-��!��'�!&��&��-.�A�! �� !�� (��-��!��'�!&�"��'(� � ��"(�)! (�,��7��(��-&.

(2)

(1)

Open Close

%��

A��B��)� ��-� �&�-� �!�� "�� 7�� (�;��-��&.�(!�-��-�� &�+�,�7��(��+�-�7,&)��)!�'��)��&�-��!�.�C��)��-��&�-��!��-��&�-��!��*!� ��&��)�,*��+�"(!�-��-�� &.�� -8� ��'�-� "�� " � )! (�&�-� ��'!�� !�� +�,� "��&�� &6!�� "��"��.9�!�*�"�� " �)! (��&�-��!��+�,�!��! � �&6!�.�� +!�!+!;�� ,�� 1��&�� &�-�!�8�)��'&��3��&(!� ��-�+�!& ��*�'��3�&�:&�"(��&�-!&()�&(!�'� '��3�&>� )(�� "(��'!�'� �!�.� �*� �!�"�� " &� ,�� &6!�8� )�&(� (��'(�,)! (�&��-�)� ��.��-�� ,� "�� (!�'� �� '&� !*� )� )! (��!�.��","�� ,� -!&��&��*� �&�-�!��-��!��*!� ��.

(1)

(2)(3)

%��

GJ

��

�!'( ��!�'� ��2��*��!��*!� ��/��!�&��'!��4�=��+�:=.��6'+8�/I.��7* >

��*!��)! (��!��-��(�"6�*��6&1) Pour oil through the filler hole and

install the filler cap. For the approximate capacity of the oil,refer to the “Capacities” item in the“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

2) Start the engine and look carefully forleaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Runthe engine at various speeds for at least5 minutes.

3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-utes. Check the oil level again and addoil if necessary. Check for leaks again.

��/F��!�&�� '!��-��Since special procedures and tools arerequired, it is recommended that you trustthis job to your

�'!�� " !��*�� To maintain optimum performance anddurability of your engine, use MARUTIGenuine Coolant or equivalent.

This type of coolant is best for your coolingsystem as it:• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-

ture.• Gives proper protection against freezing

and boiling.• Gives proper protection against corro-

sion and rust.

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-age your cooling system. Your �� can help� you select the proper coolant.

NOTICE�� 3�� !�� 6�'�8� +�6�� &�� (� � (�� !�� *!� �� !&� !'( 8� 7� � -�� 3�� !'( ��! .

NOTICE5 A(�� "!�'� (�� !�� *!� ��8� ! � !&

��"�++��-�-� (� �,��&�� '��!�� "�+�� *!� ��.� �*,��&��* ��+��6� �*!� ��8�+�6�&�� ! � !&��*��2�!3�� 2��! ,��-*��)� (�� +��*�" ��<&� !�& ��" !��&.

5 �!�� 6&� *��+� ��-� (�� !�� *!� �� -��!�� '�� !�-!"� �� !�"��" �!�& �� !��'�&6� �� -�+�'�.�� *�,�� *!�-��,� ��6&�� &�� (� � (�� *!� �� (�&� 7�� , � !'( ��-8�� (�3�� (�� 3�(!"��!�&��" �-�7,�,�� .

G/�

��

�� 3��(�"6Check the coolant level at the reservoirtank, not at the radiator. With the enginecool, the coolant level should be betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” marks.

�--!�'��

61MM0A125

NOTICE�� 3�!-� -�+�'!�'� ,�� "��!�'� &,& �+45 ��)�,&� �&�� (!'(� 2��! ,� � (,��

'�,"�� 7�&�� &!�!"� �� ,�� "�� -!�� -�)! (�-!& !��-�)� �� (�"��" �+!1 ��"��"�� !��.

5 ��6��&�� (� � (��+!1�!&��?�� "�� -!& !��-� )� �� -� !��"�&��(!'(�� (��G�?�.��"�� !��&� '�� (�� G�?�� "�� -!& !��-� )� �� )!�� "��&�� 3��(�� !�'�"��-! !��&.

5 �� &��& ��!'( �"�� !�)� ��.

5 �� --��1 �� !�(!7! ��&��--! !3�&.� �(�,� +�,� �� 7�� "�+�� !7��)! (�,��"��!�'�&,& �+.

5 �� +!1� -!**�� ,��&� �*� 7�&�"�� &.� ��!�'� &�� +�,� ��&�� !��""�� -� &�� )�� -?�� (��&&!7!�! ,� �*� &�3�� 3��(�� !�'��-��1 ��&!3��'!��-�+�'�.

A��B �'!�� "�� !&� (��+*�� *� �� !*&)��)�-� �� !�(��-.� �� -�!�6�� !*��;��"�� &�� !��.��*�&)��)�-8�-�� !�-�"��3�+! !�'.��++�-!� ��,� "�� " � �� !&�� "�� "�� (,&!"!��.��3�!-�!�(��!�'+!& ��(� �3��&M�!*�!�(��-8��+�3� �� *��&(� �!�.� �*� "�� '� &� !�� ,�&8*��&(��,�&�)! (�)� ��-�&��6�+�-!"�� !��.� A�&(� (��'(�,� �* ��(��-�!�'.�� !��"��7��!&��& ��!+��&.�C�� *� (�� "(��*"(!�-��-��!+��&.

NOTICE5 �(�� +!1 �� ,�� &�� &(��-� "��

�!�� N� "��"�� !�� *� �� !*��;�.

5 �*� (�� )�& � �+7!�� +�� !�� ,�� !&� �1��" �-� �� 7�� O�P�� :O/P�>� �� 7��)8� �&�� (!'(��"��"�� !��&�� F�N�*��)!�' (�� !�& ��" !��&� �� (�� !*��;�"�� !��.

FULL

LOW

G//

��

If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, more coolant should be added.When the engine is cool, remove thedegassing tank cap by turning it anticlock-wise slowly to release any pressure. Andadd coolant until the degassing tank levelreaches the “FULL” mark. Never fill thedegassing tank above the “FULL” mark.

�� "�+�� Since special procedures are required, we�recommend you take your vehicle to your�� for coolant�replacement.

�!��If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, therewill be greater intake resistance, resultingin decreased power output and increasedfuel consumption.

61MM0A126

Unclamp the side clamps and remove theelement from the air cleaner case. If itappears to be dirty, replace it with a newone.Clamp the side clamps securely.

B��!��&�1��!�When adding gear oil, use gear oil with theappropriate viscosity and grade as shownin the chart below.We highly recommend you use:“MARUTI ^_`#%`_ GEAR OIL G�AI�” for�manual transaxle gear oil.

�� &�1��!�

68LM728

B��!��3��(�"6�&��-�+�� &�1��

52LM021

A��B� � !&� (�;��-��&� �� +�3�� (�� &��3�!�� 6�"��:-�'�&&!�'� ��6�"��>�*��-!�&��'!��)(�� (��)� �� +�� !&� (!'(8� 7�"��&�� &"��-!�'*��!-� ��-� & ��+� +�,� 7�� 7��)�� -��&&��.�A�! �� !�� (��"�� +�� (�&� ��)��-� 7�*��+�3!�'� (��"��.

%��

CFo

o -30-22

-20-4

-1014 32 50 68 86 104

0 10 20 30 40

75W-80

(1)

%��

G/=

��

F&��-�+�� &�1��

71LS10701

��"(�"6� (��'��!��3��8��&�� (��*��)!�'��"�-��41) Park the vehicle on a level surface with

the parking brake applied. Then, stopthe engine.

2) Remove the oil filler and level plug.3) If gear oil flows from the plug hole, the oil

level is correct. Reinstall the plug. If gearoil does not flow from the plug hole, addoil through the filler plug hole until oilflows a little from the plug hole.

�!'( ��!�'� ��2��*��!��*!��-��3��'

�� &�1��:/>��:=>4=/��+�:=./�6'+8�/�.��7* >

B��!��(��'�Since special procedures, materials and�tools are required, it is recommended that�you trust this job to your �� .

��* ��-�!3!�'� (��3�(!"��8� (��'��!� �+�� +�,� 7�� (!'(� ��'(� �7��,��.�A�! �� !�� (��!�� *!��-��3�� '� !&� "�� '(� �� "()! (�,��7��(��-&�7�*��!�&��" !�'�'��!��3��.

(2)

%�� NOTICEA(�� !'( ��!�'� (�� '8� ��,� (�*��)!�'� &��!�'� "�+��-� ��2�!3�� (��'� (��-&� ��3�� !��6�'�.��L�C��9��-��.�#/=/F $��#/=/GB$

G/

��

�� "(��-��!-�� "(

64MS141

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.�If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully�depressed, have the clutch inspected by�� . If the�clutch fluid level is near the “MIN” triangle�mark, fill it up to the “MAX” triangle mark�with MARUTI genuine brake fluid.

��!� ��

64MS175

The fuel filter works as a water sedimentoras well.Drain water according to the PeriodicMaintenance Schedule. To drain water:1) Place a pan or ample rag under the fuel

filter drain nozzle.2) Loosen the drain screw (1). The water

will be drained.3) Tighten the drain screw when the water

changes to the diesel fuel.�!'( ��!�'� ��2��*��-��!��&"��)/.��+�:�./��6'+8��.G0��7* >

9��6�&9��6��!-

64MS141

Check the brake fluid level by looking atthe reservoir in the engine compartment.Check that the fluid level is between the“MAX” and “MIN” triangle mark. If thebrake fluid level is near the “MIN” trianglemark, fill it up to the “MAX” triangle markwith MARUTI GENUINE BRAKE FLUID.

MAX

MIN

(1)

%��

MAX

MIN

G/0

��

NOTE:With disc brakes, the fluid level can beexpected to gradually fall as the brake padswear.

9��6��-��Check if the brake pedal stops at the regular�height without spongy feeling when you�depress it. If not, have the brake system�inspected by your �� . If you doubt the brake pedal for the�regular height, check it as follows:

54G108

��-�� *��"�� +!�!+�+��-!&� ��"��#�$4��J�++�:=.�!�.>With the engine running, measure the dis-tance between the brake pedal and floor�carpet when the pedal is depressed with�approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) of force. The�minimum distance required is as specified.�Since your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjusting, there is no need for pedal adjust-ment. If the pedal to floor carpet distance as mea-sured above is less than the minimum dis-tance required, have your vehicle inspected�by your �� .NOTE:When measuring the distance between thebrake pedal and floor wall, be sure not toinclude the floor mat or rubber on the floorwall in your measurement.

A��B��!�� *��)� (��'�!-��!��&�7��)"�� &�� !��&�� !�E��,��&��!��&�-�+�'�� (��7��6��&,& �+.5 �*� (�� 7��6�� *��!-� !�� (�� &��3�!�

-��&��7��)��"�� !�� 3��8�� (��7��6�� )��!�'��!'( �� (�� !�& ��+�� )!�� "�+�� : (��'!��+�& ��7��!�'��)! (�� (��6!�'�� 7��6�� *��,�� -!&��'�'�->.��(��-� (��!'( �"�+��8�!++�-!�� ,�� &6�� ,�� !�&��" �� (��7��6��&,& �+.

5 ��!-�*��!-��&&�!�-!"� �&��6�!� (��7��6��&,& �+�)(!"(�&(��-�7��!�&��" �-�� 7,�� ,�� !++�-!� ��,.

5 �� &�� ,� *��!-� � (�� (�� '��!�� 7��6�� *��!-.� �� &��"��!+�-�*��!-��*��!-� (� (�&�7��& ��-�!��-��"�� !��&.� � � !&� �&&�� !�� (� � *��!'�� !"��&��-�� (��!2�!-&��6�� *� (��7��6��*��!-��&��3�!�.

��9��6�� *��!-� "�� (��+� ,�� ,�&� ��--�+�'�� !� �-� &��*�"�&.� �&�� "�� !��)(��*!��!�'� (��&��3�!�.

A��B9��6�� *��!-� !&�(��+*�� *� �� !*�&)��)�-8��-�(��+*��!*�! �"�+�&�!��"�� " �)! (�&6!��,�&.��*�&)��)�-8�-�� !�-�"��3�+! !�'.��++�-!� ��,�"�� " ��!&��"�� "�� (,&!"!��.� �*�7��6�� *��!-�'� &� !��,�&8� *��&(�,�&� )! (� )� �� -� &��6� +�-!"�� !��.� A�&(� (��'(�,� �* �� (��-�!�'.� �� !�� "�� 7�� !&��&� ��!+��&.�C�� *� (��"(��*�"(!�-��-��!+��&.

G/�

��

��6!�'�9��6�

54G109

�� "(� � �� (�&��"!*!"� !��#7$4�0 (�O�J (��3��*��"��:/>4=��:=��6'8�0��7&>

Check the parking brake for proper adjust-ment by counting the number of clicks made�by the ratchet teeth as you slowly pull up on�the parking brake lever to the point of full�engagement. The parking brake lever�should stop between the specified ratchet�teeth and the rear wheels should be�securely locked. If the parking brake is not�properly adjusted or the brakes drag after�the lever has been fully released, have the�parking brake inspected and/or adjusted by�your �� .

� ��!�'

68LM708

� ��!�'�)(��,�#"$4��O��++�:�.��O�/.=�!�.>

Check the play of the steering wheel bygently turning it from left to right and mea-suring the distance that it moves before youfeel slight resistance. The play should bebetween the specified values. Check that the steering wheel turns easily�and smoothly without rattling by turning it all�the way to the right and to the left while driv-ing very slowly in an open area. If the�amount of free play is outside the specifica-tion or you find anything else to be wrong,�an inspection must be performed by your�� .

A��B�*�,��1��!��"��,��*� (��*��)!�'��7��+&��)! (��,��3�(!"��<&��7��6��&,& �+8��(�3�� (��3�(!"�� !�&��" �-�!++�-!� ��,�7,�,�� .

!�'��!*��+�,��)(��&.>5 1"�&&!3��-�� 3��5 9��6��-��''!�'5 1"�&&!3��!&�

%��

“c”

%��

5��7��6!�'��*��+��"�5��3��7��6!�'��:7��6�&�� )��6

G/F

��

�!��&

74LHT0704

The front and rear tire pressure specifica-tions for your vehicle are listed on the TireInformation Label. Both the front and reartires should have the specified tire pressure.Note that the value does not apply to thespare tire, if equipped.

�!��&��" !��Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once amonth by performing the following checks:1) Measure the tire pressure with a tire

gauge. Adjust the pressure if necessary.Remember to check the spare tire, too.

54G136

(1) Tread wear indicator(2) Indicator location mark

2) Check that the depth of the tread grooveis more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). To helpyou check this, the tires have molded-intread wear indicators in the grooves.When the indicators appear on the treadsurface, the remaining depth of the treadis 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less and the tireshould be replaced.

3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks anddamage. Any tires with cracks or otherdamage should be replaced. If any tiresshow abnormal wear, have theminspected by your �� .

%��

A��B5 �!�� &&��&� &(��-� 7�� "(�"6�-

)(�� (�� !��&��"��-��,��+�,'� �!��""�� -!�'&.

5 �(�"6� (�� !�*�� !�� &&�� *��+ !+�� !+�� )(!�� !�*�� !�'� (�� !��'��-��,8� �� !�� (�� &��"!*!�-� ��&&��!&��7 �!��-.

5 ��3�� -��!�*�� 3��!�*�� (�� !��&.��-�� !�*�� !�� "�� "��&�� &��(��-�!�'� "(��" ��!& !"&� �� "��"��&�� (�� !+� �� &�!�� (�� !��7��-8� ��&�� !�'� !�� ""!-�� -�+�'�� (�� !��!+.�3��!�*�� !�� "�� "��&�� (�� !�� 7��& 8� ��&�� !�'� !�� &�� !�E��,.�3��!�*�� !�� "�� &�� "��&��&�� (��-�!�'� "(��" ��!& !"&)(!"(�+�,��&�� !��""!-�� .

%��

G/G

��

4) Check for loose wheel nuts.5) Check that there are no nails, stones or

other objects sticking into the tires.

�!�� !�� !�� !��

80JK040

If your vehicle is equipped with a spare tirewhich is a different wheel type than thewheels on the vehicle, you must use a 4-tire rotation as shown in the examplebelow.0 !�� !��

54G114

To avoid uneven wear of your tires and toprolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-trated. Tires should be rotated every 10000km (6000 miles). After rotation, adjust frontand rear tire pressures to the specificationlisted on your vehicle’s Tire InformationLabel.

��! !�'�"��7&��-��!�'��3��"6&�"��-�+�'�� !��&��-��**�" ��)(��!'�+�� .�9��&�� (�3�� !��&��-�)(�� !'�+�� "(�"6�-�� !�-!�"��,�� 7,�� ,�� .

A��B5 @�� L�C�� !&� �2�!��-

)! (� !��&� )(!"(� �� (�� &�+� ,�� -� &!;�.� �(!&� !&� !+�� &�� & ��!�'� ��-� (��-�!�'��*� (��3�(!"��.��3��+!1� !��&�*�-!**�� &!;�� ,�� (��*��)(��&��*�,��3�(!"��.��(��&!;��- ,�� *� !��&� �&�-� &(��-� 7�� , (�&��3�-�7,��L�C��&� & ��-��-� �� !�� 2�!�+�� *��,��3�(!"��.

5 ��"!�'� (�� )(��&� ��-� !��&�2�!��-� �� ,�� 3�(!"�� )! (� "�� !�� "�+7!�� !��&� �*� �* ��+��6� )(��&� ��-� !��&� "�� &!'�!*!"�� ,"(��'�� (�� & ��!�'� ��-� (��-�!�'"(��" ��!& !"&��*�,��3�(!"��.

5 �(��*��8��&��,� (�&��)(��- !�� "�+7!�� !��&� ��3�-� 7,�� L�C�� &� & ��-��-� �� !��2�!�+�� *��,��3�(!"��.

NOTICE��"!�'� (��!'!�� !��&�)! (� !��&��*��-!**�� &!;��+�,��&�� !��*��&��&��-�+� �� -�+� ��-!�'&.��(�"6�� )! (�� ,�� 7�*��"(�&!�'��"�+�� !��&�� (� �� -!**�� !��&!;��*��+� (��!'!�� !��&.

7-18


64MS0-74E

Wheel BalancingIf the vehicle vibrates abnormally onsmooth road, have the wheel balanced atauthorised Maruti Suzuki Workshop.

Wheel AlignmentIn case of abnormal tyre wear or pullingtowards one side, have the wheel alignedat authorised Maruti Suzuki Workshop.

Tubeless Tyres (If equipped)The vehicle is equipped with TubelessTyres. In tubeless tyre, a thin layer of butylrubber is used for lining the inside of thetubeless tyre. This layer is to prevent airloss and fulfilling the purpose of tube. Theair pressure is maintained by the sealingbetween tyre bead and wheel rim. Tube-less tyres are having advantage of slow airloss and preventing sudden deflation whiledriving.

Care and maintenance tips for tubelesstyres1) Always maintain recommended infla-

tion pressure. Driving continuously atlow inflation pressure can lead to tyredamage.

2) In case any leakage is found, check forany nail penetration/valve core damageor rim bent. Damaged wheel must notbe used.

3) In case tyre has run at low pressure, itmust be inspected for any defect.

4) Whenever new tyre is fitted, replace thevalve.

5) If continuous high speed driving isrequired, increase tyres pressure by 5psi over recommended inflation pres-sure.

6) Never run the tyre beyond TWI (Treadwear indicator). The tyre is recommen-ded to be replaced when the remainingtread has worn to this point. The indica-tors are spaced across the treadaround the tyre marked by a triangularsymbol (TWI).

7) Always prefer tubeless tyre mountingmachine. In case of manual mounting-tyre/wheel rim damage may occur.

8) In case of any problem, please get intouch with authorised Maruti Suzukiworkshop.

Battery

WARNING• Batteries produce flammable

hydrogen gas. Keep flames andsparks away from the battery or anexplosion may occur. Never smokewhen working in the vicinity of thebattery.

• When checking or servicing thebattery, disconnect the negativecable. Be careful not to cause ashort circuit by allowing metalobjects to contact the battery postsand the vehicle at the same time.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-age to your vehicle or battery, fol-low the jump starting instructionsin the “EMERGENCY SERVICE”section of this manual if it is neces-sary to jump start your vehicle.

• Diluted sulfuric acid spilled frombattery can cause blindness orsevere burns. Use proper eye pro-tection and gloves. Flush eyes orbody with ample water and getmedical care immediately if suf-fered. Keep batteries out of thereach of children.

7-19


64MS0-74E

76MS006

For maintenance-free battery (cap-lesstype), you need not add water. For tradi-tional type battery, which has water fillercaps, the level of the battery solution mustbe kept between the upper level line (1)and lower level line (2) at all times. If thelevel is found to be below the lower levelline (2), add distilled water to the upperlevel line (1). You should periodically checkthe battery, battery terminals, and batteryhold-down bracket for corrosion. Removecorrosion using a stiff brush and ammoniamixed with water, or baking soda mixedwith water. After removing corrosion, rinsewith clean water.If your vehicle is not going to be driven fora month or longer, disconnect the cablefrom the negative terminal of the battery tohelp prevent discharge.

Replacement of the battery(For D13A Diesel Engine Model)

64MM07001

NOTE:(For D13A Diesel Engine Model)To approach the battery, remove the suc-tion pipe (1).

(For D16AA Diesel Engine Model)

61MS2A006

NOTE:(For D16AA Diesel Engine Model)To approach the battery, loosen the bolts,push the locks and remove the suctionpipe (1).

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

7-20


64MS0-74E

64MM07002

To remove the battery:1) Disconnect the negative cable (1).2) Disconnect the positive cable (2).3) Remove the battery band bracket (if

equipped) (3), by removing the mount-ing bolts (4).

4) Remove the bracket bolt (5) andremove the bracket (6).

5) Remove the battery.To install the battery:1) Install the battery in the reverse order of

removal.

64MS176

NOTE:When putting the battery in the battery tray,make sure the recess on the terminal sidebottom of the battery engages with theconvex portion of the tray.2) Tighten the bracket bolt and battery

cables securely.NOTE:When the battery is disconnected, some ofthe vehicle’s function will be initialized and/or deactivated.These function are required to reset afterthe battery is reconnected.

FusesYour vehicle has three types of fuses, asdescribed below:Main fuseThe main fuse takes current directly fromthe battery.Primary fusesThese fuses are between the main fuseand individual fuses, and are for electricalload groups.Individual fusesThese fuses are for individual electrical cir-cuits.To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller (1)provided in the fuse cover.

64MS198

(1)(2)

(4)

(4)

(3)

(5)(6)

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

(1)(1)

G=/

��

��&�&�!�� (�� '!��+�� +��

61MM0B068

64MS177

The main fuse, primary fuses and some of the��individual fuses are located in the engine��compartment. If the main fuse blows, no elec-trical component will function. If a primary fuse��blows, no electrical component in the corre-sponding load group will function. When��replacing the main fuse, a primary fuse or an��individual fuse, use a ��{��To remove a fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the fuse box. The amperage of each�� fuse is shown in the back of the fuse box��cover.

(6)

(7)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(9)(10)(11)

(12)(13)(14)

(15)(16)(17)

(18)

(19)(20)(21)(22)

(23)

(24)(25)(26)(27)(28)

(29)(30)(31)(32)(33)

(34)

(35)

�� ?��@�� (1) 60 A FL7

(2) 80 A FL6

(3) 100 A FL5

(4) 80 A FL4

(5) 100 A FL3

(6) 100 A FL2

(7) 120 A FL1

(8) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal 2 (D16AA)

(9) 30 A Radiator fan 2

(10) 20 A Front fog light

(11) 7.5 A Headlight 2

(12) 25 A ABS control module

(13) 25 A Headlight

(14) 30 A Back up

(15) 40 A Ignition switch

(16) 40 A ABS motor

(17) 30 A Starting motor

(18) 30 A Radiator fan

(19) 30 A FI main

(20) 20 A Fuel pump

(21) 10 A Air compressor

(22) 7.5 A ECM (D13A)

(23) 30 A Blower fan

(24) 10 A FI 2 (D13A)

(25) 20 A INJ DRV (D13A)

(26) 7.5 A Starting signal

(27) 15 A Headlight (Left)

(28) 15 A Headlight high (Left)

(29) 7.5 A FI 2 (D16AA)

(30) 20 A INJ DRV (D16AA)

(31) 15 A FI 3 (D16AA)

(32) 15 A Headlight (Right)

(33) 15 A Headlight high (Right)

(34) 50 A Ignition switch 2

(35) 50 A Battery

G==

��

60G111

NOTE:Make sure that the fuse box always carriesspare fuses.

��&�&��-�� (��&(�9��-

64MS181

64MS112

NOTE:To approach the fuses, remove the clips(1) by prying it off with a flat blade screw-driver as shown in the illustration, thenremove the cover (2).

68LM701A��B

�*�� (��+�!�� *�&��!+��,�� *�&��7��)&8�� 7�� &�� (�3��,�� 3�(!"��!�&��" �-�� 7,�� .�� )�,&�� &�� &�� '�� *�#�� %$�� #�� !��"� ��+� �� 1��#��$��$��!�8��$�.

OK

BLOWN

��

(1)(2)(1)

(1)

(12)(10)

(13)

(36)

(2) (3) (4)

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(11) (14) (15)

(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)

(23) (24) (25) (26) (27) (28) (29)

(30) (31) (32) (33) (34) (35)

��

7-23


*Feature not available in the vehicle.

81A283

PRIMARY FUSE(1) – Blank

(2) 20 A Power window timer

(3) 15 A Steering lock

(4) 20 A Rear defogger

(5) 20 A Sunroof*

(6) 10 A DRL*

(7) 10 A Heated mirror*

(8) 7.5 A Starting signal

(9) 15 A Accessory socket 2

(10) 30 A Power window

(11) 10 A Hazard

(12) 7.5 A BCM

(13) 15 A Ignition coil

(14) 10 A ABS control module

(15) 15 A Accessory socket

(16) 10 A A-STOP controller*

(17) 15 A Horn

(18) 10 A Stop light

(19) 10 A Air bag

(20) 10 A Back-up light

(21) 15 A Wiper / Washer

(22) 30 A Front wiper

(23) 10 A Dome light

(24) 15 A 4WD*

(25) 7.5 A RR fog lamp*

(26) – Blank

(27) 7.5 A Ignition-1 signal

(28) 15 A Radio 2

(29) 10 A Accessory socket 3

(30) 15 A Radio

(31) 10 A Tail lamp

(32) 20 A D/L

(33) 7.5 A Cruise control

(34) 10 A Meter

(35) 7.5 A Ignition-2 signal

(36) 20 A Seat heater*

WARNINGAlways be sure to replace a blown�fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-age. Never use a substitute such as�aluminum foil or wire to replace a�blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and�the new one blows in a short period of�time, you may have a major electrical�problem. Have your vehicle inspected�immediately by your �� .

BLOWNOK

��

� ��

��Since special procedures are required, we�recommend you take your vehicle to your�� for headlight alignment.

� �!�"�#��$�� %��%$��&��%Since special procedures are required, we�recommend you take your vehicle to your�� for bulb replacement.

61MM0A031

��'�� ( �� ! �!%� $�� !�� )�� ) �� )! &�� *) &� +��&� &�� +��&� !�� &�� )++,� ��%� �%� �& �� %#�$��*+)&� ��)�� ! �!%,"�#��$�� ! �!%� �+��&� ��*!�$)��$))��) ��,

( �� ! �!%� �&�� +��-��#&�%% &�.��)��%,��*�$��! &%�� / &��*) ��+� ��*��&��)&��&)##��,��$�&�+ ��*,

( �)� �0)�� / &*� !*� %��&#��#�&�%�)+��!)�*1�-��&��)0�%��)��%��0��%��&��-��&�#��$��! �!%,

NOTICE�� )��%� +&)�� *) &� %2��*� $� %�� )�� ! �!� �)� )0�&�� ! &%�-�� %� �&�� )�,� 3&�%#� �� -! �!�-��$��$�)��,

NOTICE4&�5 ��&�#��$��)+�� ! �!��$��%��+)&��%#�$��)��)+��$�&�$��%*%��,��%�%�) ��!��$�&�&�� ) �� !*�� *) &�� ,

6�" � 3 �0�&��#��)�&�#��$��! �!�)+��%$��&��1�)&�*) �$) ��% +�+�&��$�&�$��%�)$2��+&)��0)��$�&$ ��%*%��,��-�*%�� 0�� %$��&�� ! �!�� &�#��$�� !*�� ,

�7

� ��

��)��%�89:

61MM0B073

61MM0B074

1) Open the engine hood. Disconnect thecoupler (2). Remove the sealing rubber(3).

64MS161

2) Push the retaining spring (4) forwardand unhook it. Then remove the bulb(5). Install a new bulb in the reverseorder of removal.

64MS162

NOTE:You can see the position of retaining springfrom the hole of headlight.

(1)

(3)

(2)

(4)

(5)

��

�;

� ��

�� &��8�+��5 �##��:

76MH0A006

1) Remove the light housing (1) by slidingto left with your finger.

76MH0A007

2) Turn the bulb holder (2) clockwise andpull it out from the light housing.

76MH0A008

(4) Removal(5) Install

3) To remove and install the bulb of theturn signal light (3), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

4&)�� &��89:4&)��)%��)��8:(Vehicle with the halogen headlights)

61MM0A030

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)

(1)

��

� ��

61MM0B077

1) Open the engine hood. To remove thebulb holder of the front turn signal light(1) or the front position light (2) from thelight housing, turn the holder counter-clockwise and pull it out.

61MM0B078


2) To remove the bulb of the front turn sig-nal light (1) from the bulb holder, push inthe bulb and turn it counterclockwise. Toinstall a new bulb, push it in and turn itclockwise.To remove and install the bulb of thefront position light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

8<��$��-��%$��&��%:

61MM0A091

To replace the bulb of the front turn signallight (1), follow the procedure for the frontturn signal light bulb replacement of thevehicle with the halogen headlights.NOTE:Position function in discharge headlamp isLED type, which is non replaceable.

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

��

(1)

�=

� ��

4&)��4)��8�+��5 �##��:1) Start the engine. Turn the steering wheel

to rotate the tires to the opposite side ofthe fog light that requires replacement.Then turn off the engine.

61MM0B079

2) Remove the screws (1).

61MM0B080

3) Remove the clips (2) by prying it off witha flat blade screwdriver as shown in theillustration.

61MM0B081

4) Open the end of the cover inside thefender.

80JM071

5) Disconnect the coupler by pushing thelock release. Turn the bulb holder coun-terclockwise and remove it.

(1)��

(2) ��

��

��

�>

� ��

"��&��)�!��)��

61MM0B082

1) Remove the bolts (1) and pull the lighthousing (2) straight.

61MM0B083

2) To remove the bulb holder of the rearturn signal light (3) or the tail/brake light(4) from the light housing, turn theholder counterclockwise and pull it out.

61MM0B084


3) To remove the bulb of the rear turn sig-nal light (3) or the tail/brake light (4) frombulb holder, push in the bulb and turn itcounterclockwise. To install a new bulb,push it in and turn it clockwise.

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(3) / (4)(5)

(6)

��

�?@

� ��

61MM0B085

NOTE:When reinstalling the light housing, makesure the clips are properly attached.

"�0�&%��

61MM0B088

1) Open the tailgate. Remove the clips (1)by prying it off with a flat blade screw-driver as shown in the illustration. Then,pull out the trim (2).

61MM0B089

2) Disconnect the coupler (3) by pushingthe lock release. Turn the bulb holder of

the reversing light (4) counterclockwiseand remove it.

61MM0B090


3) To remove and install the bulb of thereversing light (4), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

(2)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(4)

(5)

(6)

��

�?9

� ��

��$��%��

61MM0B086

1) Turn the cover (1) counterclockwise toremove it.

61MM0B087

2) To remove and install the bulb of thelicense plate light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

��) ��)#��

80J100

1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts(1) as shown in the illustration.

(1) (2)

(1) ��

�?

� ��

63J127

2) Close the tailgate. Remove the high-mount stop light housing (2) from thetailgate.

68KS063

3) Remove the bulb holder as shown inthe illustration.

76MH0A128


4) To remove and install the bulb of thehigh-mount stop light (3), simply pull outor push in the bulb.

(2)��

��

(3)

(4)

(5)

��

�??

� ��

��&�)&��Remove the lens by using a flat blade screwdriver covered with a soft cloth as shown. To install it, simply push it back in.4&)��8-��) ��)0�&��$)�%)��:

61MM0A207

4&)��8-��)0�&��$)�%)��:

64MS123

��&

60G115

� ��$)�#�&��8�+��5 �##��:

61MM0B072

�?�

� ��

3�)0��)A��8�+��5 �##��:�Since special procedures are required, we�recommend you take your vehicle to your�� for bulb replacement.

61M0108

1) Press inward on both side of the glovebox to unclamp it.

61M0109

2) Push the damper (1) (if equipped) right-ward to remove the grove box.

64MS096

3) To remove and install the bulb of theglove box light (2), simply pull out orpush in the bulb.

6�#�&��%

54G129

If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-aged, or make streaks when wiping,replace the wiper blades.To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-cedures below.

NOTE:Some wiper blades may be different from�the ones described here depending on�vehicle specifications. If so, consult your�� for proper replacement method.

��

��

(1)

(2)

��NOTICE

�)� �0)�� %$&��$�� )&� !&��2�� -��)-1� �)� �)�� -�#�&� �&�%�&�2��-��)-�-��&�#��$��-�#�&�!��,

�?7

� ��

4)&�-��%��-�#�&%B

70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

NOTE:When raising both of the front wiper arms,pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.When returning the wiper arms, lower thepassenger’s side wiper arm first.Otherwise, the wiper arms may interferewith each other.

54G130

2) Squeeze lock (1) towards wiper arm (2)and remove the wiper frame from thearm as shown.

3) Unlock the lock end of the wiper bladeand slide the blade out as shown.

"��)0��

60A260

��%��)�

54G132

(1) Locked end

��

�?;

� ��

54G135

(1) Retainer4) If the new blade is provided without the

two metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

60MH071

60MH072

(A) Up(B) Down

NOTE:When you install the metal retainers (3),make sure the direction of metal retainersas shown in the above illustrations.5) Install the new blade in the reverse order

of removal, with the locked end posi-tioned toward the wiper arm.Make sure the blade is properly retainedby all the hooks. Lock the blade end intoplace.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, makingsure that the lock lever is snappedsecurely into the arm.

4)&�&��&�-�#�&%B

80G146

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-dow.

2) Remove the wiper frame from the armas shown.

3) Slide the blade out as shown.

(3)

(3)

��

(3)

(A)

(B)

��

�?�

� ��

65D151

NOTE:Do not flex the wiper blade frame end morethan necessary. If you do, it can break off.

54G135(1) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without thetwo metal retainers, move them fromthe old blade to the new one.

5) Install the new blade in the reverseorder of removal.

Make sure the blade is properlyretained by all the hooks.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm in thereverse order of removal.

6��%��6�%��&�4� ��

64MS097

Check that there is washer fluid in the tankby looking at the washer fluid level gaugewhich is attached to the cap of the washerfluid tank. If the fluid level is near empty,refill it. Use a good quality windshieldwasher fluid, diluted with water as neces-sary.

��

��

��

6�" � 3�)��)�� %�� &��)&��+&��.�� -��%�� -�%��&� &�%�&0)�&,� ��%$�� %�0�&��*� ��#��&� 0�%�!��*� -��%#&�*��)�� -��%��1��%)��*) &�0��$��C%�#��,

NOTICE�� *� &�% �� +� �� -�%��&�)�)&��%�)#�&��-��)�+� ��-�%��&��2,

EXAMPLE

�?=

� ��

��&��)��)��*%��If you do not use the air conditioner for along period, such as during winter, it maynot give the best performance when youstart using it again. To help maintain opti-mum performance and durability of your airconditioner, it needs to be run periodically.Operate the air conditioner at least once amonth for one minute with the engineidling. This circulates the refrigerant and oiland helps protect the internal components.

"�#��$��)+��&��)��)��&��4��&�8�+��5 �##��:Since special procedures are required, we�recommend you take your vehicle to your�� for the air conditioner filter replacement.

1) To access the air conditioner filter,remove the glove box. Refer to the pro-cedure for the bulb replacement of the“Glove Box Light” in this section.

79MH0761

2) Remove the cover (1) and pull out theair conditioner filter (2).

NOTE:When you install a new filter, make surethe UP mark (3) faces upward.

(1)

(2)

(3)

��"3� �D��"<��

��"3� �D��"<��&��))�� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =9E�$2��%�& $��)�%� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =E �#��&��%�& $��)�%� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =7�)-��,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =;�+��&��&��)�%� )��#�&��,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =��+��%�4�))��,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =��+��0�&��%� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, =�6�&��&��,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,�==

8

=9

��"3� �D��"<��

��&��))�

61MM0B100

(1) Spare tire(2) Jack(3) Jack handle(4) Wheel Brace(5) Luggage Compartment Board

The tire changing tools are stowed in the luggage compartment.

(3) (4)(2) (5)(1)

��

64MS142

To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (1)counterclockwise and remove it.

6�" � 3�+��&� %��&��$��))�%1�!�% &�� )� %�)-� �� %�$ &��*� )&� ��*$�� $� %�� / &*� �+� �� $$��)$$ &%,

��'�� /�$2� %�) �� !�� %�� )��*� �)$��-��%,��%��#)&��)�&�� /�$2�� %�& $��)�%� �� %� %�$��)�� !�+)&�� #�� )� %�� /�$2,

(1)

��

=

��"3� �D��"<��

E�$2��%�& $��)�%

75F062

1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift

into “R” (Reverse).

3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher ifyour vehicle is near traffic.

4) Block the front and rear of the wheeldiagonally opposite of the wheel beinglifted.

5) Place the spare wheel near the wheelbeing lifted as shown in the illustrationin case that the jack slips.

54G253

63J100

63J101

6) Position the jack at an angle as shownin the illustration and raise the jack byturning the jack handle clockwise untilthe jack-head groove fits around thejacking bar beneath the vehicle body.

7) Continue to raise the jack slowly andsmoothly until the tire clears theground. Do not raise the vehicle morethan necessary.

6�" � 3( ��% &��)�%��+�� )�F"G�8"�0�&%�:-��*) �/�$2� #��0��$��,

( �0�&� /�$2� #� ��0��$��-�� &��%�A�� F G� 8 � �&��:,� ��&-�%�1� �%��!�� /�$2� ��*� $� %�� $$��,

=?

��"3� �D��"<��

�)�"��%��<��$��-��3�&��E�$2• Apply the garage jack to one of the points

indicated below.• Always support the raised vehicle with

jack stands (commercially available) atthe points indicated below.

4&)��/�$2��#)��+)&��&��/�$2�89:

64MS178

"��&�/�$2��#)��+)&��&��/�$2�8:

64MS140

�##��$��)��#)��+)&�/�$2�%��8?:�)&��-)$)� ��+�

61MM0B103

6�" � 3( '%��/�$2�)��*��)�$��-��%)��0��1��&��&) ��,

( �0�&� /�$2� #� �� 0��$�� )�� $��% &+�$�,

( �0�&�&��%��0��$��-��/�$2��)$��)��)��&��%#�$�+��/�$2��#)�� 8%�)-�� %�&��)�:��&��-��)�!��$��,

( ��2��% &�� /�$2� �%� &��%��%�� 7�� 89� ��$�:� !�+)&�� $)��$�%� �� +��,� '%�� )+� �� /�$2-�� %�-��7�� 89� ��$�:�)+!�� + ��*� $)��#%�� *� &�% �� +�� &��)+��/�$2,

( �0�&�� &��0��$��-��%�% ##)&��!*��/�$2,

( �0�&�& ��-��0��$�� %� % ##)&�� !*� �� /�$2� ��0�&��)-�#�%%��&%��)�&��0��$��,

(1)

��

(2)

��

(3) (3)

��

=�

��"3� �D��"<��

NOTE:For more details, please contact an �� .

��6��%To change a wheel, use the following pro-cedure:1) Remove the jack, tools and spare

wheel from the vehicle.2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel

nuts.3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking

instructions in this section).

4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.

65J4033

5) Before installing the new wheel, cleanany mud or dirt off from the surface ofthe wheel (1), hub (2), thread part (3)and surface of the wheel nuts (4) with aclean cloth. Clean the hub carefully; itmay be hot from driving.

6) Install the new wheel and replace thewheel nuts with their cone shaped endfacing the wheel. Tighten each nutsnugly by hand until the wheel issecurely seated on the hub.

��)&5 ��+)&�-�� =7� ��8=,��2��1�;,��!+�:

7) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nutsin a crisscross fashion with a wrench asshown in the illustration.

NOTICE �0�&� �##�*� �� &�� /�$2� �)� ��A�� %�� #�#�1� %�� &� %#)��&� 8�+�5 �##��:1� �� &$)0�&� )&� &��&�)&%�)��!��,

6�" � 3( ��% &��)�%��+�� )�F"G�8"�0�&%�:-��*) �/�$2� #��0��$��,

( �0�&� /�$2� #� ��0��$��-�� &��%�A�� F G� 8 � �&��:,� ��&-�%�1� �%��!�� /�$2� ��*� $� %�� $$��,

(2)

(4)

(1)

(3)

6�" � 3'%�� -�� %��)��%#�$�+��)&5 ��%��%))��%��#)%%�!�� +��&�� $��-��%,��$)&&�$��-�� %�� )&�� #&)#�&�*��-�� %��*�$)��))%��)&�+��)++1�-��$��$��&�% ��$$��,�� +��*) ��)��)��0�� )&5 ��-&��$�1��0�� -�� )&5 ��$��$2�� !*�� ,

81A057

=7

��"3� �D��"<��

E �#�%��&��%�& $��)�%

6��E �#��&��D) &�<��$��1�'%��4)��)-��&)$�� &�B1) Use only a 12-volt battery to jump start

your vehicle. Position the good 12-voltbattery close to your vehicle so that thejump leads will reach both batteries.When using a battery installed onanother vehicle, DO NOT LET THEVEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parkingbrakes fully on both vehicles.

2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, exceptthose necessary for safety reasons (forexample, headlights or hazard lights).

54MN259

3) Make jump lead connections as follows:1. Connect one end of the first jump

lead to the positive (+) terminal of theflat battery (1).

2. Connect the other end to the positive(+) terminal of the booster battery (2).

3. Connect one end of the second jumplead to the negative (–) terminal of thebooster battery (2).

4. Make the final connection to anunpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.engine mount bracket (3)) of theengine of the vehicle with the flat bat-tery (1).

6�" � 3( �0�&� ��#�� )� / �#� %��&�� *) &0��$��+��!��&*��##��&%��)�!�+&).��,� ��&��%� �� %� $)��)��*� �A#�)�� )&� & #� &�� +� / �#%��&��%��#��,

( 6�� 2�� / �#� �� $)��$��)�%1� !�� $�&�� *) &� ��%�� / �#� ��%� &�� $��&+&)��# ��*%1�!��%1�)&�+��%,

( ��&��%� #&)� $�� +��!��*�&)�� %,� H��#� +��%� ��%#�&2%��-�*�+&)��!��&*�)&��A#�)%�)��*�)$$ &,� �0�&�%�)2�-��-)&2��0�$��*�)+��!��&*,

( �+� �� !))%��&� !��&*� *) � %�� +)&/ �#�%��&��%��%��)��&0��$��1��2��% &��-)�0��$��%�&��)��) $��$��)��&,

( �+� *) &� !��&*� ��%$��&��%� &�#��*1�+)&��)��##�&��&��%)�1��0��*) &�� 0��$�� %#�$�� !*�� ,

( �)��0)��&�� )�*) &%��+�)&�� )� *) &� 0��$�� )&�!��&*1� +)��)-� �� / �#� %��&�� %�& $��)�%!��)-�#&�$�%��*��)&��&,

( �+�*) ��&��) !�1�$��+)&�5 ��+��&)��%�&0�$�,

NOTICED) &�0��$��%�) ��)��!��%��&��!*# %�� )&� �)-��,� ��%� %��&��)�� $) �� &�% �� #�&�� )� �� $��*��$� $)�0�&��&,'%��/ �#��%��)�%��&��0��$��-��-��2�)&�+��!��&*,

6�" � 3 �0�&�$)��$��/ �#��&�$��*�)��0��8I:��&��)+��%$��&��!��&*1�)&��A#�)%�)��*)$$ &,

(2)

(1)

(3)

1

23

4

��

=;

��"3� �D��"<��

4) If the booster battery you are using is fit-ted to another vehicle, start the engine ofthe vehicle with the booster battery. Runthe engine at moderate speed.

5) Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery.

6) Remove the jump leads in the exactreverse order in which you connectedthem.

�)-��If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional service. Your dealercan provide you with detailed towinginstructions.

6��&�0��86�:�� &��%�A��Manual transaxle vehicles may be towedusing either of the following methods.1) From the front, with the front wheels

lifted and the rear wheels on the ground.Before towing, make sure that the park-ing brake is released.

2) From the rear, with the rear wheels liftedand the front wheels on the ground, pro-vided the steering and drivetrain are inoperational condition. Before towing,make sure that transaxle is in neutral,the steering wheel is unlocked (vehiclewithout keyless push start system - theignition key should be in the “ACC” posi-tion) (vehicle with keyless push start sys-tem - the ignition mode is ACC), and thesteering wheel is secured with a clamp-ing device designed for towing service.

��'�� )��$�� / �#� �� )� �� ) �� !&�$2�� %�$ &��*,� �+� �� / �#�� %$)��$�%� +&)�� ) ��!&�$2��!�$� %��)+�0�!&��)��%��&��)+� ��1� �� / �#� ��$) ��!��$� ��&�0��!��%, NOTICE

�!%�&0�� +)��)-�� %�& $��)�%-��)-��*) &�0��$��,( �)��#��0)��)�*) &�0��$�� &��)-��1�#&)#�&��5 �#�� )-�� #&)$�� &�%� � %�� !� %��,

( '%�� +&�� ))21� �)-� *) &0��$��)��#�0��&)��%�+)&�%�)&��%��$�%��)-�%#��,

NOTICE�� %��&�� $)� �� %� �)�� %�&)��) ��)�-��%��%�)$2%��&��%��+&)��+&)��-��%�� &��)-��,��-�*%� ��)$2��%��&��-��!�+)&��)-��,

=�

��"3� �D��"<��

�+��&��&��)�%� )��#�&��1) Try turning the ignition switch to the

“START” position or try pressing theengine switch to change the ignitionmode to START with the headlightsturned on to determine the battery condi-tion. If the headlights go excessively dimor go off, it usually means that either thebattery is flat or the battery terminal con-tact is poor. Recharge the battery or cor-rect battery terminal contact asnecessary.

�+��%�4�))��If the engine is flooded with the fuel, it maybe hard to start. If this happens, press theaccelerator pedal all the way to the floorand hold it there while cranking the engine. • For petrol engine model, do not operate

the starter motor for more than 12 sec-onds.

• For diesel engine model, do not operatethe starter motor for more than 30 sec-onds.

�+��0�&��%The engine could overheat temporarilyunder severe driving conditions. If the highengine coolant temperature warning lightcomes on as overheating during driving:1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and

park.3) Let the engine run at the normal idle

speed for a few minutes until the highengine coolant temperature warninglight goes off.

�6�" � 3�+� *) � %�� )&� ��&� �%$�#�� %��1%�)#� �� 0��$�� %�+�� #��$�� *�� &��)++��)�� $))�,� �)� �)�� )#�� ))��-��%�� %� #&�%��,� 6�� %��$��)��)��&�!��%��)&��&�1�)#��))��)�%�� +� ��$))�� %�%��!)��,� �+� �� %1�*) �� %��-�� %�)#%�!)��!�+)&��*) �#&)$��,

==

��"3� �D��"<��

If the high engine coolant temperaturewarning light does not go off:1) Turn off the engine and check that the

water pump belt and pulleys are notdamaged or slipping. If any abnormalityis found, correct it.

2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”line, look for leaks at the radiator, waterpump, and radiator and heater hoses. Ifyou locate any leaks that may havecaused the overheating, do not run theengine until these problems have beencorrected.

3) If you do not find a leak, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir and then theradiator, if necessary. (Refer to “EngineCoolant” in the “INSPECTION ANDMAINTENANCE” section.)

NOTE:If your engine overheats and you are�unsure what to do, contact your �� .

65D350d

6�&��&��

MHO-07-001

In case of vehicle break-down or duringemergency stopping, where, your vehiclecould become a potential traffic hazard,keep the warning triangle, provided withyour vehicle, on the road free from anyobstacles behind your vehicle so as towarn the approaching traffic, at an approxi-mate distance of 50-100 m. The reflectingside of the triangle should face the on com-ing traffic. Please activate the hazardwarning lamps before alighting the vehicleto keep the warning triangle.

6�" � 3( ��%��.�&�) %��)�&��)0��&��)&�$�#�8)&��%%��2�$�#�+)&��%��:�-��-��&��#�&�� &�� %��1�!�$� %��%$��+� ��%��*�!��!�)-��) � ��&� #&�%% &�,� �� $�#� %�) ��)��*�!��2��)++�-��$))��#�&�� &��%��)-�&��,

( �)� ��#� #&�0�� #�&%)�� / &*12��#� ��%1� �))�%� �� $�)��-�*� +&)�� $))�� +�� &$)��)��&� +�� 8�+�5 �##��:,��%��$�&�$� +��%�$�� )��$��*�� &��)��-��) ��-�&��,

��

��

=>

��"3� �D��"<��

MHO-07-014

• Remove the warning triangle carefullyfrom the cover as shown by arrow 1.

• Open both the reflector arms as shownby arrow and lock the arms with eachother with the clip provided in the rightarm. Open the bottom stand in counterclock-wise direction as shown by arrow3. Position the warning triangle behindthe vehicle on a plain surface.

• Reverse the removal procedure for keep-ing inside the cover.

MHO-07-014

��"� ��"�

>

��"� ��"��)&&)%�)��&�0��)�� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, >9<��$�� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, >

>9

��"� ��"�

��"� ��"��)&&)%�)��&�0��)�It is important to take good care of yourvehicle to protect it from corrosion. Listedbelow are instructions for how to maintainyour vehicle to prevent corrosion. Pleaseread and follow these instructions carefully.

��#)&��+)&��)��!) ��)&&)%�)��)��)��$� %�%�)+�$)&&)%�)�1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, mois-

ture, or chemicals in hard-to-reachareas of the vehicle underbody orframe.

2) Chipping, scratches and any damage totreated or painted metal surfacesresulting from minor accidents or abra-sion by stones and gravel.

��0�&)�� $)��)�%�-��$��$$��&��$)&&)%�)�1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea

air or industrial pollution will all acceler-ate the corrosion of metal.

2) High humidity will increase the rate ofcorrosion particularly when the tem-perature range is just above the freez-ing point.

3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehiclefor an extended period of time may pro-mote corrosion even though other bodysections may be completely dry.

4) High temperatures will cause an accel-erated rate of corrosion to parts of the

vehicle which are not well ventilated topermit quick drying.

This information illustrates the necessity ofkeeping your vehicle (particularly theunderbody) as clean and dry as possible. Itis equally important to repair any damageto the paint or protective coatings as soonas possible.

�)-��)��#��&�0��)&&)%�)�6�%��*) &�0��$��+&�5 ��*The best way to preserve the finish on yourvehicle and to help avoid corrosion is tokeep it clean with frequent washing.Wash your vehicle at least once during thewinter and once immediately after the win-ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly theunderside, as clean and dry as possible.If you frequently drive on salted roads,your vehicle should be washed at leastonce a month during the winter. If you livenear the ocean, your vehicle should bewashed at least once a month throughoutthe year.For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi-cle Cleaning” section."��)0��+)&��&��#)%��%Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings andindustrial fall-out may damage the finish ofyour vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.Remove these types of deposits as quicklyas possible. If these deposits are difficult towash off, an additional cleaner may be

required. Be sure that any cleaner you useis not harmful to painted surfaces and isspecifically intended for your purposes.Follow the manufacturer’s directions whenusing these special cleaners."�#��&�+��%��Carefully examine your vehicle for damageto the painted surfaces. Should you findany chips or scratches in the paint, touchthem up immediately to prevent corrosionfrom starting. If the chips or scratches havegone through to the bare metal, have aqualified body shop make the repair.H��#�#�%%��&�� $)�#�&��%�$��Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate underthe floor mats and may cause corrosion.Occasionally, check under these mats toensure that this area is clean and dry. Morefrequent checks are necessary if the vehicleis used off road or in wet weather.Certain cargos such as chemicals, fertiliz-ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-rosive by nature. These products should betransported in sealed containers. If a spill orleak does occur, clean and dry the areaimmediately.��)&�� *) &� 0��$�� &*1� -��0��&��Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated area. If you often wash yourvehicle in the garage or if you frequentlydrive it in when wet, your garage may bedamp. The high humidity in the garagemay cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet

>

��"� ��"�

vehicle may corrode even in a heatedgarage if the ventilation is poor.

<��$��

76G044S

��&�)&<��*�� #�)�%��&*Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-gent mixed with warm water. Apply thesolution to the vinyl with a sponge or softcloth and let it soak for a few minutes toloosen dirt.Rub the surface with a clean, damp clothto remove dirt and the soap solution. Ifsome dirt still remains on the surface,repeat this procedure.4�!&�$� #�)�%��&*Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap solution, rub stainedareas with a clean damp cloth. To removesoap, rub the areas again with a clothdampened with water. Repeat this until thestain is removed, or use a commercial fab-ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use afabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-facturer’s instructions and precautions.��&� #�)�%��&*Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.To remove soap, wipe the areas again witha soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe theareas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat thisuntil the dirt or stain is removed, or use acommercial leather cleaner for tougher dirtor stains. If you use a leather cleaner,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and precautions. Do not use solventtype cleaners or abrasive cleaners.

6�" � 3�)��)��##�*��)�� &$)��)&� & %�� #&�0��0�� $)�� )�� )&�&) ��A�� %�� %*%��$)�#)��%% $�� %� �� $��*��$� $)�0�&��&1�A�� %�� #�#�%1� ��$,� �� +�&�� $) �� !�%��&��+�� &$)��% !%��$�!�$)��%�)0�&��,

6�" � 36��$��&�)&�)&��A��&�)&)+��0��$��1� �<�"�'��+��!��%)�0��%� % $�� %� ��$5 �&� ��&%1#��&)�1�!��.��)&�$��&��%% $�� %� !��$��%� )&� %�&)�� ) %��)��&��%,��&��%�$) ��$� %�� #�&%)�� / &*� )&� �� )��0��$��,

>?

��"� ��"�

NOTE:• In order to keep leather upholstery look-

ing good, it should be cleaned at leasttwice a year.

• If leather upholstery becomes wet,immediately wipe it dry with tissue paperor a soft cloth. Water may cause leatherto harden and shrink if it is not wiped off.

• When parking on sunny days, select ashady place or use a sunshade. Ifleather upholstery is exposed to directsunlight for a long time, it may discolorand shrink.

• As is common with natural materials,leather is inherently irregular in grain andcowhide has spots in its natural state.These do not affect the performance ofthe leather in any way.

��!��%Clean seat belts with a mild soap andwater. Do not use bleach or dye on thebelts. They may weaken the fabric in thebelts.<��*��+�))&��%Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinylwith water or mild soap. Use a brush tohelp loosen dirt. After the dirt is loosened,rinse the mat thoroughly with water anddry it in the shade.��&#��%Remove dirt and soil as much as possiblewith a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soapsolution, rub stained areas with a cleandamp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas

again with a cloth dampened with water.Repeat this until the stain is removed, oruse a commercial carpet cleaner fortougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and precautions.��%�& ��#��$)�%)��Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.Gently wipe dirt off with a tightly squeezeddamp clean cloth. Repeat this until the dirtis removed.

��A��&�)&

��&��+)&�� 6��%NOTE:• Do not use an acidic or alkaline detergent

to wash aluminum wheels. These types ofdetergent will cause permanent spots,discoloration and cracks on finished sur-faces.

• Do not use a bristle brush and soap con-taining an abrasive material. These willdamage finished surfaces.

NOTICE�)� �)�� %�� $��$�� #&)� $�%� ��$)�� %��$)�� )� -�#�� $�&�$��$)�#)��%� % $�� %� �� &� $)��)�� %*%��1� � ��)1� ��0��)�%*%��1�)&�)��&�%-��$��%,��%��-��$� %��)��$)�#)��%,

NOTICE�� %� ��#)&�� *) &� 0��$�� !�2�#��$��+&��+&)��&�,�4�� &��)�2��#�*) &�0��$��$��*�&�% ��+��)+��#��)&�$)&&)%�)��)0�&�) %�#�&�%�)+��0��$��!)�*,

>�

��"� ��"�

6�%��

60B212S

When washing the vehicle, park it wheredirect sunlight does not fall on it and followthe instructions below:1) Flush the underside of body and wheel

housings with pressurized water toremove mud and debris. Use plenty ofwater.

2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.Remove dirt and mud from the bodyexterior with running water. You mayuse a soft sponge or brush. Do not usehard materials which can scratch thepaint or plastic. Remember that theheadlight covers or lenses are made ofplastic in many cases.

3) Wash the entire exterior with a milddetergent or car wash soap using asponge or soft cloth. The sponge orcloth should be frequently soaked in thesoap solution.

4) Once the dirt has been completelyremoved, rinse off the detergent withrunning water.

5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle bodywith a wet chamois or cloth and allow itto dry in the shade.

6�" � 3( �0�&��#��)�-�%��-�A�*) &0��$��-��& ��,

( 6��$�� &%��)+��!)�*� �� +��&1� -��&�� &�� *!�� %��&#�� #�&�%1� *) � %�) ��-��&��)0�%��)��%��0��%��&��)� #&)��$�� *) &� ��%� �� &�%+&)��!��$ �,

( �+��&�-�%��*) &�0��$��1�$�&�+ ��*��%�� !&�2�%� !�+)&�� &�0�� )��2�� % &�� *� ��0�� &��)&��++�$��0��%%,

��'�� +� *) &� 0��$�� %� �5 �##�� -�� &��%��%��-�#�&�%*%��1�#��$��-�#�&�$)��&)��0�&��F�44G�#)%��)�,��+��0�&��%��+��F�'��G#)%��)�1� ��-�#�&%�$) �� A#�$��*�)#�&��$� %��/ &*1��$) ��%)�!��,

NOTICE6��-�%��0��$��B( �0)��&�$��%��)&��)��-��&)+��)&��=@J��89�;J4:�)��#��%��$�#�&�%,

( �)��0)��$)�#)��%1� �)� �)�� %�� #&�%% &�.��-��&��$)�#�&��,

NOTICE�)��0)��)��#��)&�#��%��$� % &+�$�1� �)� �)�� -�#�� &�� )++-��) �� #��-��&,� �� % &�� )� +)��)-��!)0��#&)$�� &�,

NOTICE6�� %�� $)��&$�� $�&� -�%�#&)� $�1�)!%�&0��$� ��)�%�%#�$�+�� !*� �� +�$� &�&,� �0�&� %�%�&)�� ) %��)�� &��%� )&%)�#%,

>7

��"� ��"�

6) Check carefully for damage to paintedsurfaces. If there is any damage, touch-up the damage following the procedurebelow:1. Clean all damaged spots and allow

them to dry.2. Stir the paint and touch-up the dam-

aged spots lightly using a smallbrush.

3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

6�A��

60B211S

After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-ishing are recommended to further protectand beautify the paint.• Only use waxes and polishes of good

quality.• When using waxes and polishes,

observe the precautions specified by themanufacturers.

NOTICE�+� *) � %�� )��$� $�&� -�%�1��2�� % &�� *) &� 0��$��C%� !)�*#�&�%1� % $�� %� %#)��&%1� $��)�� !��,��+�*) ��&��) !�1�$)�% ��$�&�-�%��)#�&��)&�+)&��0�$�,

3� �"�� 4�"��

9@

3� �"�� 4�"�� <��$��+�$��)�� ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9@9"��)�4&�5 ��$*��+�$��)��8"4��:��8�+��5 �##��: ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, 9@

9@9

3� �"�� 4�"��

<��$��+�$��)��%%�%��&�� !�&

79MH0A01

64MS179

The chassis and/or engine serial numbersare used to register the vehicle. They are

also used to assist your dealer when�ordering or referring to special service�information. Whenever you have occasion�to consult your �� , remember to iden-tify your vehicle with this number. Should�you find the number difficult to read, you�will also find it on the identification plate.

��&�� !�&

60G128

The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the illustration.

��

��

10-2

GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio frequency identification (RFID) tag (if equipped)As per Ministry of Road Transport andHighways, the Radio frequency identifica-tion (RFID) tag (1) is mandatory for eachvehicle for the purpose of electronic tollcollection or any other purpose as may bedefined by the Government of India.

In case of any damage to RFID tag orreplacement of front windscreen, pleasecontact your nearest

76MH1001

As seen from inside of the vehicle

76MH1002

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purposeonly. Internal structure of actual devicemounted on vehicle may be different.

As seen from outside of the vehicle

76MH1003

NOTE:The picture shown is for indicative purposeonly. Internal structure of actual devicemounted on vehicle may be different. NOTE:• RFID tag needs to be registered by gov-

ernment authorized agency (if applica-ble).

• Any attempt to remove the tag from thewindscreen will result in permanent dam-age to the tag.

• Use of chemical cleaners to clean thewindscreen area where the tag ismounted can damage the tag.

• Use of any sharp objects on the tag candamage the tag.

(1)

11-1

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONSNOTE:Specifications are subject to change without notice.M/T: Manual transaxle

UNIT: mmITEM: DimensionsOverall length 4300Overall width 1765Overall height 1585without Roof rails

with Roof rails 1590Wheelbase 2600Track Front 1535

Rear 1505

UNIT: kgITEM: Mass (weight)Curb mass (weight) D13A��_`^%`_ 1180 – 1205

D16AA��_`^%`_ 1250 – 1275Gross vehicle mass (weight) rating D13A��_`^%`_ 1670

D16AA��_`^%`_ 1740Permissible maximum Axle Weight

FrontD13A��_`^%`_ 860

940Rear 840

||�}~~��|��_`^%`_�||��}~��|��_`^%`_

D16AA��_`^%`_

11-2

SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM: EngineType D13A (DOHC) D16AA (DOHC)Number of cylinders 4 4Bore 69.6 mm 79.5 mmStroke 82.0 mm 80.5 mmPiston displacement 1248 cm3 1598 cm3

Compression ratio 17.6 : 1 16.5 : 1

ITEM: ElectricalBattery D13A ENGINE DIN55L/DIN50L

D16AA ENGINE DIN65LFuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

��

��

�� Headlight Halogen 12V 60/55W H4

Discharge 12V 25W D5SFront fog light 12V 35W H8Position light 12V 5W W5W

LED –Turn signal light Front 12V 21W PY21W

Rear 12V 21W PY21WSide turn signal light 12V 5W WY5W

LED –Tail/brake light 12V 21/5W P21/5WHigh mount stop light 12V 5W W5WReversing light 12V 16W W16WLicense plate light 12V 5W W5WInterior light Glove box light (if equipped) 12V 1.4W –

Footwell light (if equipped) /Instrument panel pocket light(if equipped)

LED –

Center 12V 10W –Other lights 12V 5W W5W

��

��

*1 When tire replacement is necessary and if the specified load index and speed rated tire is not available, then use a tire of higher loadindex and speed rating.

*2: The spare wheel provided with alloy wheel variant is steel wheel rim, hence follow 4 tire rotation only. (Refer: Section“Inspection and maintenance”)

�� !"#��$��Tire size, front and rear 205/60R16 92H*1*2

Tire size, spare 205/60R16 92H*2 (Steel wheel)Rim size 205/60R16 tire: 16X6JTire pressures For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located

on the driver’s door lock pillar.

��%�&�''�"#�#�(� )�(*$�&!"��!"#��!+!&��,!++$�-�.Fuel 48 LEngine oil D13A��_`^%`_ 3.2 L (replacement with oil filter)

D16AA�_`^%`_ 5.25 L (replacement with oil filter)Engine coolant D13A�_`^%`_ 6.0 L (including reservoir tank)

D16AA�_`^%`_ 5.5 L (including reservoir tank)Manual transaxle oil 5M/T 2.6 L

6M/T 2.1 LBrake fluid / Clutch fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “INSPEC-

TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

Documents

S-Cross Owner's Manual 25-June 2015 LPPL Final Updated ... · (wgn (knvgt (wgn vcpm ecr (wgn nkpgu cpf eqppgevkqp .gcmcig (wgn nvgt ycvgt ftckpkpi )&"5*/( "/%,1$ /#4- h %jgemgf 1-